4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

574-848 Rev BF
*574848BF*
This page is intentionally blank
 Contents
1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information............................................................................................................ 9
2 Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals.................................................. 10
3 Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards......................................................................................................................11
3.1 Codes and Standards....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Environmental Operating Range.....................................................................................................................................................................................11
4 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System...............................................................................................................12
4.1 System configurations......................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.2 Standalone configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................................12
4.2.1 System design..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.3 MINIPLEX configuration....................................................................................................................................................................................................13
4.3.1 System design..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.2 RUI communication........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
4.4 Network configuration..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.4.1 Hub and star configurations............................................................................................................................................................................................................16
4.4.2 Connection loops............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.4.3 System design..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.4.4 Network communication.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
4.5 4100ES Back Boxes........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.6 4100ES PIDs....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.6.1 Basic Control Panels (United States)............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
4.6.2 Basic Control Panels (Canada)........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.6.3 Basic Control Panels (International).............................................................................................................................................................................................. 20
4.6.4 Transponders...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.6.5 Remote Annunciator......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.6.6 Remote Display Assemblies.............................................................................................................................................................................................................21
4.6.7 Basic Audio Selections...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.6.8 Utility Cabinets.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
4.6.9 Master Controller Upgrade Kits......................................................................................................................................................................................................22
4.6.10 Rack Mount Kits................................................................................................................................................................................................................................22
4.6.11 Power Distribution Modules......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
4.6.12 Expansion Bays.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................22
4.6.13 Expansion Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs........................................................................................................................................................................... 22
4.6.14 Communication Modules...............................................................................................................................................................................................................22
4.6.15 Power Supplies................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23
4.6.16 Signaling Modules............................................................................................................................................................................................................................24
4.6.17 Annunciator Modules..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.6.18 Transponders and Transponder Components.........................................................................................................................................................................24
4.6.19 Audio Operator Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................................................................24
4.6.20 Audio Controller Boards.................................................................................................................................................................................................................25
4.6.21 Telephones/Microphones.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
4.6.22 Additional Audio Modules............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
4.6.23 Common Audio Options................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.6.24 Amplifiers........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.6.25 Miscellaneous Modules..................................................................................................................................................................................................................27
4.7 4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U)...................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.7.1 System Types and Options.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
4.7.2 Master Controller Option Module................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
4.7.3 NAC Modules.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................27
4.7.4 IDC Modules........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
4.7.5 Optional Modules...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................28
4.7.6 Auxiliary Relay Controls.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
4.7.7 Audio Controllers and Amplifiers................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
4.7.8 Audio Options..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.7.9 Annunciation Modules...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.7.10 Miscellaneous Modules..................................................................................................................................................................................................................29
4.7.11 Network Modules.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................29
4.7.12 System Accessories......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5 Installing FACP Components............................................................................................................................................. 30
5.1 Introduction to the FACP..................................................................................................................................................................................................30
5.1.1 CPU Bay................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
5.2 SPS CPU Bay Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2.1 RUI+ Master Motherboard...............................................................................................................................................................................................................32
5.2.2 Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)............................................................................................................................................................................... 33
5.2.3 Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs........................................................................................................................................................................................34
5.2.4 Master Controller Switches..............................................................................................................................................................................................................34
5.2.5 System Power Supply (SPS)............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 35
5.3 EPS CPU Bay Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.1 The Power Distribution Interface................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.2 RUI+ Master Motherboard...............................................................................................................................................................................................................36
5.3.3 Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)............................................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3.4 Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs........................................................................................................................................................................................39
5.3.5 Master Controller Daughter Card Switches.................................................................................................................................................................................39
5.3.6 Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2........................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
5.4 FACP Operator Interface.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
5.4.1 Operator Interface............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
5.5 FACP Expansion Bays........................................................................................................................................................................................................43
5.5.1 Additional CPU Bay Modules...........................................................................................................................................................................................................43
5.5.2 Expansion Bays................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
5.6 FACP Power Requirements.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
5.6.1 System Power......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
5.6.2 Power Requirements.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
5.7 Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
5.7.1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................45
5.7.2 Mounting the Back Boxes................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45
5.7.3 Back Box side views........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
5.8 Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics...................................................................................................................................................................... 48
5.8.1 Mounting the System Electronics Bays.........................................................................................................................................................................................48
5.9 Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)............................................................................................................................................................................51
5.9.1 Trim Application.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
5.10 Step 4. Mounting the Door............................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
5.10.1 Attaching Doors................................................................................................................................................................................................................................54
5.10.2 Reversing the Door..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................55
5.11 Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay..................................................................................................................................................... 56
5.11.1 4100ES CPU Bay Placement Guidelines.................................................................................................................................................................................... 56
5.12 Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays......................................................................................................................................................... 57
5.12.1 4100ES Placement Guidelines......................................................................................................................................................................................................57
5.12.2 Motherboard Placement Guidelines for a 4100ES bay..........................................................................................................................................................58
5.12.3 Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines............................................................................................................................... 59
5.12.4 Installing 4 X 5 Cards.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................60
5.12.5 Installing Motherboards into a 4100ES Expansion Bay......................................................................................................................................................... 60
5.13 Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays................................................................................................................................................................. 62
5.13.1 Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
5.13.2 Power Distribution Module Connections.................................................................................................................................................................................. 62
5.13.3 SPS CPU Card Interconnections in the CPU Bay..................................................................................................................................................................... 64
5.13.4 SPS CPU Card Interconnections in Expansion Bays............................................................................................................................................................... 65
5.13.5 SPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections............................................................................................................................................................................65
5.13.6 EPS CPU Bay Interconnections.....................................................................................................................................................................................................65
5.13.7 EPS CPU Interconnections in Expansion Bays......................................................................................................................................................................... 66
5.13.8 EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections............................................................................................................................................................................66
5.13.9 Connecting to 4100 Motherboards............................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
5.14 Step 8. Configuring Cards.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
5.14.1 RUI+ Master Motherboard Configuration..................................................................................................................................................................................70
5.14.2 Master Controller Daughter Card Configuration..................................................................................................................................................................... 70
5.14.3 SPS Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 70
5.14.4 EPS Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 71
5.14.5 PDI Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................71
5.14.6 Configuring Other Cards................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 71
5.15 Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries................................................................................................................................................................... 71
5.15.1 Installing and Removing Batteries in a One Bay Cabinet.......................................................................................................................................................71
5.15.2 Installing and Removing Batteries in a Multi-Bay Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................73
5.16 Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures.........................................................................................................................................74
5.16.1 System Power Up Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................................................74
5.16.2 System Power Down Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................................74
 5.16.3 The Terminal Block Utility Module............................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
5.16.4 Mounting to the Electronics Bay.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 75
6 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components....................................................................................................................... 76
6.1 Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders....................................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.1.1 Transponder Cabinets.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................76
6.1.2 Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) and Audio Riser Modules...............................................................................................................................................76
6.1.3 Basic TICs..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................76
6.1.4 The Local Mode TIC........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.1.5 TIC Audio Risers.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 76
6.1.6 TIC Illustrations....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................77
6.1.7 Local Mode Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................................77
6.1.8 LEDs....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 78
6.1.9 Card Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................78
6.2 MINIPLEX System Guidelines...........................................................................................................................................................................................79
6.2.1 Guidelines.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................79
6.3 Configuring Cards............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
6.3.1 TIC Configuration................................................................................................................................................................................................................................79
6.3.2 Configuring Other Cards.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
6.4 TIC/Riser Mounting........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
6.4.1 Mounting Instructions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................80
6.5 TIC/Motherboard Interconnections................................................................................................................................................................................ 81
6.5.1 Interconnections.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................81
6.6 RUI Wiring.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
6.6.1 RUI/RUI+ Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
6.6.2 Wiring Configurations........................................................................................................................................................................................................................82
6.7 MINIPLEX Audio Wiring.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
6.7.1 Analog Interconnections...................................................................................................................................................................................................................82
6.7.2 Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)...............................................................................................................................................83
7 4120 Networking................................................................................................................................................................ 85
7.1 Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card........................................................................................................................................................ 85
7.1.1 Network Module Illustrations..........................................................................................................................................................................................................86
7.1.2 NIC Card LED Indications................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 86
7.1.3 4100 Motherboard Options............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
7.1.4 NIC Card Modules.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
7.1.5 Requirements and Limitations........................................................................................................................................................................................................89
7.2 Step 1. Configuring Network Cards................................................................................................................................................................................ 89
7.2.1 Motherboard Jumper Settings........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 89
7.2.2 NIC Card Address Setting.................................................................................................................................................................................................................90
7.2.3 NIC Card Jumper Settings.................................................................................................................................................................................................................90
7.2.4 Wired Media Card Jumper Settings............................................................................................................................................................................................... 90
7.2.5 Modem Media Card Jumper Settings............................................................................................................................................................................................90
7.2.6 Dual Fiber Media Jumper Settings (746-109 only)..................................................................................................................................................................... 90
7.2.7 Duplex Fiber Media Configuration (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, 0566-1200 only)............................................................................................ 90
7.3 Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC..................................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.3.1 Media Card Mounting....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
7.4 Step 3. Mounting Network Cards....................................................................................................................................................................................92
7.4.1 Daughter Card Installing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................92
7.5 Step 4. Wiring Network Cards......................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
7.5.1 Wiring Guidelines............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
7.5.2 Wiring Distances................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 94
7.5.3 Related Documentation....................................................................................................................................................................................................................94
7.5.4 Dual Fiber Media Cards Fiber-Optic Wiring (565-261, 566-376, 746-109 only)................................................................................................................. 94
7.5.5 Dual Fiber Media Cards Fiber-Optic Connection Types (565-261, 566-376, 746-109 only)............................................................................................95
7.5.6 4190-9010 Coupler Requirements................................................................................................................................................................................................ 95
7.5.7 Duplex Fiber Optic wiring (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, or 0566-1200 only).......................................................................................................96
7.5.8 Duplex Fiber-Optic Cable Distance Specifications (566-1197, 566-1198, 566-1199, 566-1200)...................................................................................97
7.5.9 Wiring with the Wired Media Card.................................................................................................................................................................................................98
7.5.10 Modem Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
7.5.11 Modem Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................100
7.5.12 Wiring Illustrations.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................100
7.5.13 Wired Media Class X (Style 7) Wiring........................................................................................................................................................................................ 101
7.5.14 Fiber Optic Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only).................................................................................................................... 102
 7.5.15 Wired Media and Fiber Optic Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only)...................................................................................103
7.5.16 Duplex fiber optic Class X (Style 7) wiring (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, 0566-1200 only)...........................................................................104
7.5.17 Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)................................................................................................................................................................ 105
7.6 Network Audio Wiring.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
7.6.1 Head-End Audio Network Configuration................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
7.6.2 Locations on the Network Audio Riser Controller Module................................................................................................................................................... 107
7.6.3 Card Specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
7.6.4 Analog Interconnections................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 109
7.6.5 Digital Interconnections for the 4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller.................................................................................................................................110
7.6.6 Distributed Microphone Interconnections................................................................................................................................................................................111
7.6.7 Reference for MCC DARIC Installation........................................................................................................................................................................................ 112
7.7 Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug.............................................................................................................................................................................. 112
7.7.1 Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug........................................................................................................................................................................ 112
8 ES Net Networking........................................................................................................................................................... 114
9 The System Power Supply (SPS)..................................................................................................................................... 115
9.1 SPS Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 115
9.1.1 Input/Output/Battery Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................... 115
9.1.2 SPS Current Consumption.............................................................................................................................................................................................................115
9.2 SPS Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
9.2.1 Jumper Settings................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 116
9.2.2 Setting the Device Address............................................................................................................................................................................................................116
9.3 SPS LED Indications........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 117
9.3.1 LEDs.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.4 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
9.4.1 IDNet Power Monitor Trouble.......................................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.4.2 Extra Device.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.4.3 Class A Trouble................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
9.4.4 Earth Fault Search............................................................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.4.5 Short Circuit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.4.6 Channel Fail....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
9.4.7 No Answer/Bad Answer................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 118
9.4.8 Output Abnormal.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................118
10 4100ES SPS Field Wiring................................................................................................................................................ 119
10.1 General Field Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................................................................................................119
10.1.1 General Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................119
10.1.2 Power-Limited Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
10.2 Power Supply Wiring Distances.................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
10.2.1 Class A NAC Wiring Table.............................................................................................................................................................................................................121
10.2.2 Class B NAC Wiring Table.............................................................................................................................................................................................................122
10.3 SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines................................................................................................................................................................................ 122
10.3.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................122
10.4 SPS NAC Wiring............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 123
10.4.1 Class A NAC Wiring........................................................................................................................................................................................................................123
10.4.2 Class B NAC Wiring........................................................................................................................................................................................................................123
10.5 SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines..............................................................................................................................................................................124
10.5.1 IDNet Wiring....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................124
10.5.2 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................124
10.6 SPS IDNet Wiring...........................................................................................................................................................................................................125
10.6.1 Class A Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 125
10.6.2 Class B Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 125
10.7 SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring..........................................................................................................................................................................................126
10.7.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................126
10.7.2 Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................127
10.8 SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring........................................................................................................................................................................................... 127
10.8.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................127
10.8.2 Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................128
11 EPS with IDNet 2.............................................................................................................................................................129
11.1 EPS Specifications......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 129
11.1.1 Card Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................................................129
11.2 EPS Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 130
11.2.1 Setting the EPS Address.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 130
 11.2.2 Earth Connect Jumper..................................................................................................................................................................................................................132
11.2.3 Battery Disconnect Jumper......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 132
11.3 EPS IDNet 2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................................133
11.3.1 Setting the Address.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................133
11.4 Connections...................................................................................................................................................................................................................135
11.4.1 Connection to the Power Distribution Module......................................................................................................................................................................135
11.5 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................................................................135
11.5.1 LED Trouble Indicator Overview................................................................................................................................................................................................ 135
11.5.2 System Trouble LED Codes.........................................................................................................................................................................................................136
11.5.3 SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes...............................................................................................................................................................................................137
11.5.4 Trouble Messages..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................138
12 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring................................................................................................................................................. 139
12.1 EPS Wiring Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 139
12.1.1 General Wiring Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 139
12.1.2 Power-Limited Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 139
12.2 EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring............................................................................................................................................................................................140
12.2.1 Wiring Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 140
12.2.2 IDNAC Wiring Guidelines............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 140
12.2.3 IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................................141
12.2.4 Ferrite Beads.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 141
12.3 EPS Wiring Tables..........................................................................................................................................................................................................141
12.3.1 Class B Wiring Tables....................................................................................................................................................................................................................141
12.4 EPS Wiring to Devices...................................................................................................................................................................................................144
12.4.1 Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices............................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
12.4.2 4009 IDNAC Repeater.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
12.4.3 Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI)........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 144
12.4.4 Calculating Class B wiring with Isolators..................................................................................................................................................................................145
12.5 EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring..........................................................................................................................................................................................145
12.5.1 AUX/ NAC Terminal........................................................................................................................................................................................................................145
12.6 IDNet 2 Card Wiring......................................................................................................................................................................................................148
12.6.1 Wiring Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 148
12.6.2 Wiring Parameters.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................148
12.6.3 Class A Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 148
12.6.4 Class B Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 149
13 PC Software Connections.............................................................................................................................................. 151
13.1 Software Modes............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
13.2 Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port........................................................................................................................................................... 152
13.2.1 Ethernet Service Port Overview (0566-719 only).................................................................................................................................................................. 152
13.2.2 Serial Service Port Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 153
14 MNS/ECS Application..................................................................................................................................................... 154
14.1 Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System............................................................................................................................... 154
14.1.1 General Information..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 154
14.1.2 Hierarchy of Operator Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 154
14.1.3 Priority of Signals........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 154
14.1.4 Overriding Fire Alarm Signals..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 154
14.1.5 Timing Equations........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 155
14.1.6 Appliance Control Equations...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 155
14.1.7 Public Accessible Panic Switches...............................................................................................................................................................................................155
14.2 Programming and Configuration................................................................................................................................................................................155
14.2.1 Programming the 4100ES to Meet MNS Requirements......................................................................................................................................................155
14.2.2 Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU..............................................................................................................................................................................156
14.2.3 Access and Security Information for the 4100ES System................................................................................................................................................... 156
14.2.4 Voice Control Centers...................................................................................................................................................................................................................156
14.2.5 Configuration Limitations............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 157
14.2.6 Amber Strobes............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 157
14.2.7 MNS Wiring......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................157
15 Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch.....................................................................................................158
15.1 The Service Port............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 159
16 Appendix B: Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)............................................................ 160
16.1 Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems.............................................................................................................................................................................160
16.2 MINIPLEX System Components.................................................................................................................................................................................. 161
16.2.1 The RUI Card...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................161
16.2.2 Transponder Cabinets..................................................................................................................................................................................................................162
16.2.3 The Remote Interface Card (RIC)............................................................................................................................................................................................... 162
16.3 MINIPLEX System Guidelines...................................................................................................................................................................................... 162
16.3.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................162
16.4 Installing Modules into Back Boxes............................................................................................................................................................................163
16.4.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................163
16.4.2 Installing the RUI Motherboard................................................................................................................................................................................................. 163
16.4.3 Installing the RIC II Motherboard...............................................................................................................................................................................................164
16.4.4 Connecting the 733-525 Harness............................................................................................................................................................................................. 165
16.5 MINIPLEX Wiring........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 166
16.5.1 Wiring Configurations................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 166
16.5.2 Class A Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 167
16.5.3 Class B Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 167
16.5.4 Wiring Illustration...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................168
17 Appendix C: Checking System Wiring.......................................................................................................................... 169
17.1 Using the Volt/ Ohm Meter......................................................................................................................................................................................... 169
17.2 Checking System Wiring...............................................................................................................................................................................................169
17.2.1 Meter Readings.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 169
18 Appendix D: References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions..................................................................... 171
19 Appendix E: Labels......................................................................................................................................................... 178
20 Appendix F: Earth Fault Diagnostics............................................................................................................................ 180
20.1 General Guidelines....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 180
20.2 Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel..............................................................................................................................................................181
20.2.1 Access Level Selection..................................................................................................................................................................................................................181
20.2.2 Starting the Earth Fault Search.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
20.2.3 Search Option A: Select Location.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
20.2.4 Search Option B: Select Channel...............................................................................................................................................................................................182
20.2.5 Search Option C: Last Search Result........................................................................................................................................................................................ 182
20.2.6 Completing the Search.................................................................................................................................................................................................................182
20.3 Search Results............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 183
20.3.1 Non-Point Faults............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 183
20.3.2 Point Faults......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................183
20.3.3 Fault Not Found............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 184
20.3.4 No Fault............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................184
20.3.5 Result Not Available...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 184
20.4 Earth Fault Search Example.........................................................................................................................................................................................184
21 Appendix G: Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories...............................186
22 Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices.............................................................................................. 189
22.1 EPS Compatible Devices.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 189
22.2 EPS Compatible Appliances.........................................................................................................................................................................................189
23 Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special
Applications.......................................................................................................................................................................... 192
23.1 Synchronizing Horn Strobes........................................................................................................................................................................................192
23.2 Synchronizing strobes.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192
23.3 Appliances with synchronizing strobes......................................................................................................................................................................193
23.4 Synchronizing horns.....................................................................................................................................................................................................194
23.5 Coded audible appliances........................................................................................................................................................................................... 195
23.6 Non-synchronizing appliances.................................................................................................................................................................................... 195
24 Appendix J: Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm......................................................196
24.1 Compatible Audio System Components....................................................................................................................................................................196
24.2 Compatible Notification Appliances........................................................................................................................................................................... 196
24.3 Audio Options Alongside Compatible Equipment....................................................................................................................................................198
25 Appendix K: Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U).................................................................... 200
25.1 Introduction to FACPs.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 200
25.1.1 Master Controller Bay.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 200
25.1.2 Master Motherboards and Controllers....................................................................................................................................................................................200
 25.1.3 Universal Power Supply (UPS).................................................................................................................................................................................................... 203
25.1.4 Operator Interface........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 204
25.1.5 Additional CPU Bay Modules......................................................................................................................................................................................................204
25.1.6 Expansion Bays.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 204
25.1.7 System Power................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 205
25.2 Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes......................................................................................................................................................................................205
25.2.1 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................206
25.2.2 Installing the Back Box(es)...........................................................................................................................................................................................................207
25.3 Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes.................................................................................................................................................... 207
25.3.1 Installing the System Electronics Bays..................................................................................................................................................................................... 208
25.4 Step 3. Configuring Modules.......................................................................................................................................................................................211
25.4.1 Master Motherboard Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
25.4.2 565-333 Master Controller Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................................211
25.4.3 565-148 Master Controller Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................................211
25.4.4 UPS Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 211
25.4.5 Configuring Other Cards..............................................................................................................................................................................................................212
25.5 Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards..............................................................................................................................................213
25.5.1 Interconnecting Cards.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 213
25.6 Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays............................................................................................................................................. 213
25.6.1 Guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................213
25.6.2 Installing Motherboards...............................................................................................................................................................................................................213
25.6.3 Connecting the 733-525 Harness............................................................................................................................................................................................. 214
This page is intentionally blank
 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to
this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX™ PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the
contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized
Simplex product supplier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be
performed by a representative or an authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.

STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:

• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

EYE SAFETY HAZARD Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety limits. Do
not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.

SULFURIC ACID WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy
fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with sulfuric acid,
immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
SYSTEM REACCPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with
NFPA-72, after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion
of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations,
or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently
affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper
system operation verified.

Important: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to
the Technical Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

page 9 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

2 Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency

Approvals
EMC Emissions
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emission Requirements (USA)
System Type:
• Fire Alarm Control Panels: 4100-9111, ,,4100-9121, 4100-9131, ,,4100-9211, 4100-9230, 4100-9311, 4100-9314, 4100-9331, ,,,,,4100-9511,
4100-9512, 4100-9513, ,,,4100-9534.
• Transponders and Remote Annunciators: 4100-9600, 4100-9601, 4100-9610
• Analog and Digital Audio Options: 4100-9620, 4100-9621
• Network Display Units: 4100-9141, 4100-9142, ,,,,4100-9241, 4100-9242, 4100-9342, 4100-9352, ,4100-9542, 4100-9157, 4100-9158, 4100-9159,
4100-9160, 4100-9161, 4100-9162, 4100-9163, 4100-9164, 4100-9165, 4100-9168, 4100-9169, 4100-9170, 4100-9248, 4100-9249, 4100-9250,
4100-9251, 4100-9252, 4100-9253, 4100-9357, 4100-9358, 4100-9359, 4100-9545.
Manufacturer’s Name: Simplex Time Recorder Co., D/B/A Simplex-US
Manufacturer’s Address: 50 Technology Drive, Westiminster MA 01441-0001, United States of America.

page 10 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

3 Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards

This equipment meets the requirements of the following agencies.

• UL (UL 864)
• ULC (S527)
• FM (Class No. 3010)
• CSFM
• MEA

3.1 Codes and Standards

If the notification appliances and accessories referenced in Table I are installed in accordance with either NFPA 12A or NFPA 2001, the system must
employ an additional mechanicallyoperated manual release mechanism.
The installer should be familiar with the relevant codes listed below, as well as any other applicable local codes and standards, when installing a fire
alarm system.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 11 Standard for Low-Expansion Foam and Combined Agent Systems
NFPA 11A Standard for Medium- and High-Expansion Foam Systems
NFPA 12 Standard for Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 12A Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
NFPA 15 Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and FoamWater Spray Systems
NFPA 16A Standard for the Installation of Closed-Head Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 17 Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 25 Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 750 Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Protection Systems
ULC S524 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems (Canadian Systems)
UL 1076 Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

3.2 Environmental Operating Range

o o o o
The 4100ES and all modules are rated to operate at ambient temperatures from 32 F - 120 F (0 C - 49 C).
o o
The 4100ES and all modules are rated for operation at 90 F (32 C), 93% RH (non-condensing).

page 11 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

The 4100ES is an expandable fire alarm system that can be used as a standalone system with one host panel, or as a wide-ranging system with several
remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. This chapter is an overview of standalone, MINIPLEX®, and network 4100ES system concepts.
Two types of 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) configurations are described in this manual:
• The “SPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that use a System Power Supply (SPS) card as the FACP’s Central Processing Unit’s (CPU) powers
supply.
• The “EPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that have an Extended Power Supply (EPS) module fitted with an IDNET 2 card as the CPU FACP
power supply
References to “non-4100ES/4100U”, “Legacy 4100”, “4120”, or “4020” throughout the manual are for retrofit applications only.

4.1 System configurations

The 4100ES is available as a standalone system with one host panel, or as an expansive system with several remote back boxes, with or without
multiple host panels. The type of configuration used depends on the size of the site into which it is being installed.
The following types of configurations are offered:
Standalone. Comprised of one FACP and its assorted notification appliances, initiating devices, and signaling line circuit devices.
MINIPLEX. A standalone system plus remote transponder cabinets, which allow for additional slave modules to be used. Typically used for multi-level
buildings and small multi-building applications.
Network. A multi-FACP system connected by network cards. Each panel maintains the status and control of its own circuit points while monitoring
and controlling activity at other locations. Network nodes may perform similar tasks, or may be dedicated to specific functions.
This chapter outlines the fundamental concepts of each configuration

4.2 Standalone configuration

The standalone version of the 4100ES is used for smaller or single-building applications. A standalone system is ideally placed into a small building that
requires a limited number of notification appliances and initiating devices.
If a small building is being expanded, or if other buildings are being constructed in the same general area (as in a campus application), the standalone
4100ES can be expanded into one of the larger systems described later.

4.2.1 System design

The standalone 4100ES uses one FACP (one, two, or three bays) containing the following:
• Central Processing Unit (CPU)
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES FACP (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)
• Optional slave cards
All appliances and devices are connected to that one FACP, as shown in Figure 1.

page 12 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

To additional IDNet devices, up to 250 total

TrueAlarm smoke
to Device sensor with base
- IDNET IN +
+IDNET IN -

Supervised IAM

Remote line
powered isolator
FIRE ALARM

PULL DOWN

Addressable
station
1 + 24V ZONE PWR + 5
2 0V ZONE PWR - 6
3 +IDNET IDC + 7
4 - IDNET IDC - 8

1 5

2 6

4
SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO.

4090-9101
MONITOR ZAM, CLASS B
INSTAL. INSTR. 574-183

DATE CODE:

1
7

8
to Device(s)

Monitor, signal, and

Relay IAMs
TrueAlarm thermal
sensor with base

AB C D EF G HI
ZONE SI G AUX

SYSTEM IS NORMAL 1 2 3
08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00 JKL
FB
M NO
IO
PQ R
I DNe t

ALARMS SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power

4 5 6
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced S TU VW X Y Z/
P A L
7 8 9
'SP' ( ) ,0:
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System
NET ADDR
Ack Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset
0 DEL

Event More Enter C/Exit

Time Info P revi ous

Menu
On Next
Enable
Arm

Off Lamp
Disable Auto
Disarm Test

Emergency Operating Instructions

Alarm or Warning Condition How t o Silence Building Signals
System indi cator flashing. Tone On. Press Alarm Silence.

How to Acknowledge / View Events How t o Reset System

Press ACK located und er flashing indicato r. Press System Reset.
Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Press Ack to silence tone device.
Local tone will silence .

Fire Control

Figure 1: Standalone 4100ES system

4.3 MINIPLEX configuration

The MINIPLEX version of the 4100ES Fire Alarm System, which is designed for moderately larger applications than the standalone configuration, allows
up to 2000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator points to be controlled by a single FACP.
Like the standalone system, only one CPU is used. Remote Unit Interface (RUI) data and power is distributed from the host panel to remote boxes
called transponder cabinets. The exact system design varies, depending on whether the system is a 4100 or a 4100ES:
• 4100ES: Transponder interface cards (TICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power directly from the CPU motherboard and
distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.
• 4100: Remote interface cards (RICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power from the remote unit interface (RUI) card in the
host panel and distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.

4.3.1 System design

The MINIPLEX 4100ES FACP must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)

page 13 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100 only (non-4100ES/4100U): Remote unit interface (RUI) Card

• Optional slave cards
Each transponder cabinet, meanwhile, must contain a Transponder Interface Card (TIC) and any number of optional slave cards.

4.3.2 RUI communication

4100ES power and data from the CPU may have to be routed over long distances in a MINIPLEX system. An RUI line, routed from either the CPU in
the 4100ES or the RUI card in the 4100ES, allows the power and data to travel longer distances. Once the RUI line terminates at a remote box, the TIC
(4100ES) or RIC (4100) at that box distributes the CPU’s power and data to the remote modules.
Figure 2 outlines this process in a typical 4100ES MINIPLEX setup.

page 14 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Risers from 4100ES to

Remote Transponders RUI I/F Slave
RUI
Analog Audio 9th Floor
Digital Audio (DAR)
FF Telephone
Transponder
Slave Slave
Unit
Shown wired
as Class X (Style 7)
(Style 4 also supported)

RUI I/F Slave

6th Floor
Transponder
Slave Slave
Unit

Transponders may be located

further apart (within the 2500'
limit) as called for by the
application requirements.

RUI I/F Slave

3rd Floor
Transponder
Unit
Slave Slave

4100ES

RUI Risers - 4 MAX (same channel) Note:

(from CPU Motherboard or Remote Although not shown, nested
Unit Interface Card)
RUI is supported up to one
Digital Audio Riser level deep.
(from Digital Audio Controller)

Analog Audio Risers - 2MAX

(from Analog Audio Controller)

FF Telephone Riser
(from Phone Controller)

Figure 2: MINIPLEX 4100ES system

page 15 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4.4 Network configuration

The 4100ES can be expanded to a network system by using network interface cards (NICs). When a NIC is installed into a 4100ES host panel, it is
used to connect to up to 98 other network nodes. Nodes may consist of other host 4100ES panels, or they may be completely different: 4010 FACPs,
TrueSite® Workstation, and Voice Command Centers (VCCs) are all examples of what could be used as nodes. A node is a self-sufficient CPU that
controls appliances and devices, which also has the capability of controlling and communicating with other nodes.
The network configuration supports two prevalent architectures, or wiring configurations: hub or ring, or star. A networked system can also use a
combination of the two.

4.4.1 Hub and star configurations

The hub configuration consists of a main loop with nodes connected in a radial manner. The star configuration consists of several nodes connected
directly to one common node. Physical bridge cards are used for the star configuration. Physical bridges reduce the amount of wire that would
otherwise be needed to connect all nodes in a loop, and therefore cut down on system response time. A combination of the two styles is illustrated in
Figure 3.
4100U Panel

Fire Control

Ring Topology
Network,
Class X (Style 7)

Hub Node, 4100ES

TrueSite Workstation Star Topology

Connections

4100/4120 Panel

Fire Control

Figure 3: Hub/Ring configuration

4.4.2 Connection loops

Network loops can be joined via physical bridge cards. There may be no more than two Class X (Style 7) network loops (two hub configurations)
connected in tandem. For every two loops that are interconnected (using one physical bridge), there can be a maximum of three physical bridges used
in a star configuration. See Figure 4.

page 16 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Remote Node

Physical Bridge Link

Fire Control Fire Control

Hub
Local Loop Node
Remote Loop
Fire Control Fire Control

TrueSite Workstation Hub Node Physical Bridge Link TrueSite Workstation

Physical Bridge Links

Fire Control Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4

1 2 3
Physical Bridging
(Star Configuration)
Fire Control

Up to Four Network Loops can be

connected using 3 Physical Bridges

Figure 4: Interconnected loop configuration

4.4.3 System design

To be used as a network node, a 4100ES panel must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply
• 4100 Network Interface Card
• Optional slave cards

4.4.4 Network communication

Network communication is achieved via the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC). Each network node requires a NIC. Once the FACP is a network
node, it may be programmed to be fully in control of other nodes, or to be fully passive, or anywhere in between.

4.5 4100ES Back Boxes

This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.
The 4100ES Back Boxes are shipped as follows:
Box and door enclosures:
2975-9441 One Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panels – Red (743-934)
2975-9442 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-935)
2975-9443 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-936)
2975-9444 One-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-937)
2975-9445 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-938)
2975-9446 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-939)
2975-9447 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-940)
2975-9448 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-941)
2975-9449 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-942)

page 17 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

2975-9450 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-943)
2975-9451 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-944)
2975-9452 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-945)
Doors and Dress Panels:
4100-2104 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-950)
4100-2105 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-951)
4100-2106 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-952)
4100-2114 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-953)
4100-2115 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-954)
4100-2116 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-955)
4100-2124 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-956)
4100-2125 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-957)
4100-2126 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-958)
4100-2134 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-959)
4100-2135 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-960)
4100-2136 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-961)
Back Boxes by themselves:
2975-9407 One-Bay Red Box (742-414)
2975-9408 Two-Bay Red Box (742-416)
2975-9409 Three-Bay Red Box (742-418)
2975-9438 One-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-946)
2975-9439 Two-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-947)
2975-9440 Three-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-948)
Accessories:
2975-9812 Red Trim Band (742-638)
2975-9813 Semi-Flush Trim Band – Platinum (743-949)

4.6 4100ES PIDs

This section lists the PIDs (model numbers) that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm System. There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:
• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes
- offered as an after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations
The 4100ES features either a 2x40 alphanumeric display, or the multi-line LCD of the Flexible User Interface.

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this manual.

page 18 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4.6.1 Basic Control Panels (United States)

Control panels available in the U.S. that use the SPS:
• 4100-9111 2x40 Master Controller – Domestic (742-830)
4100-9114 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Domestic (743-201) (120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9
A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9121 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (742-729) (120 VAC 60 HZ), Displays (2), CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that
includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery
Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9122 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (743-239) (120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Cards (2), System Power
Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9
A Total Signal/Card Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9131 Master Controller – Domestic (742-844) (120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9
A Total Signal/Card Power.
Control panels available in the U.S. that use the EPS:
• 4100-9311 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1026) (120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel (RUI+), Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B
IDNAC
(127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total
Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.
• 4100-9314 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1027) (120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm (English) Display with raised keys, CPU Card, Isolated RUI
channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189
Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for
charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power
(6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9331 Master Controller– Domestic (743-1028) (120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface
Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC
(127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total
Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.

4.6.2 Basic Control Panels (Canada)

Control panels available in Canada that use the SPS:
• 4100-9112 2x40 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-831)/
4100-9115 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Canadian English (743-202)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24
VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9113 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Canadian French (742-832)/
4100-9116 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller –
Canadian French (743-203)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24
VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9132 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-845)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24
VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9133 4100-9133 (742-846)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24
VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
Control panels available in Canada that use the EPS:
• 4100-9312 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1029)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/
Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple
NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance
Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

page 19 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-9313 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1030)

(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/
Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple
NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance
Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9315 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1031)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification
Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9316 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1032)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Distribution Interface Board,
Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/
Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault
Detection.
• 4100-9332 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1033)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/
Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple
NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance
Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

4.6.3 Basic Control Panels (International)

International control panels that use the SPS:
• 4100-9211 2x40 Master Controller – International (742-848)/
4100-9212 Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-204)
4100-9214 Master Controller – China 220/240V (743-765) (220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay,
24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9213 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-333)
(120 VAC 60 HZ) Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 V
Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power
• 4100-9230 Master Controller – International (742-849)
(220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet
channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
International control panels that use the EPS:
• 4100-9511 Master Controller – International (743-1034)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification
Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9512 Master Controller – International (743-1035)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert
Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah
batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System,
IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9513 Master Controller – International (743-1036)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class
B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and
9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+
Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9531 Master Controller 250PTS (1 Loop) – International (743-1037)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification

page 20 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module.
• 4100-9532 Master Controller 500PTS (2 Loops) - International 743-1038)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification
Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module,
IDNet
(4 X 5) Module.
• 4100-9533 Master Controller 750PTS (3 Loops)- International (743-1039)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification
Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module,
2 IDNet
(4 X 5) Modules.
• 4100-9534 Master Controller 500PTS (5 Loops)- International (743-1040)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 x 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power
Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification
Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module,
IDNet Module 250 points (4100-3107).

4.6.4 Transponders
This section lists the two transponder cabinets, both of which include an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder
interface card (TIC):
• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (742-866). Includes a basic TIC.
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (742-867). Includes a local mode TIC.

4.6.5 Remote Annunciator

• 4100-9610 Remote Annunciator (742-868). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card
(TIC).
• 4100-9611 Remote Annunciator (743-081). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card
(TIC).

4.6.6 Remote Display Assemblies

• 4100-9401 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
(743-187). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9402 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
(743-188). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9421 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French
(743-189). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9422 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French (743-190). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User
Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9441 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-191). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9442 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-192). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

4.6.7 Basic Audio Selections

This section lists the two audio cabinets, both of which include an audio expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI), audio controller board,
and a microphone module.
• 4100-9620 Basic Audio with Microphone – Analog (742-869)
• 4100-9601 Basic Audio with Microphone – Digital (742-870)

Note: Refer to Appendix J: Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm for information about 520 Hz compatible audio compo-
nents.

page 21 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4.6.8 Utility Cabinets

This section lists the two utility cabinets, which contain mounting rails for bays and mounting plates for 2120 modules.
• 4100-9642 Two-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-871). Includes two-bay mounting rails and two 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U)
expansion bays.
• 4100-9643 Three-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-872). Includes three-bay mounting rails and three 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U)
expansion bays.

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

4.6.9 Master Controller Upgrade Kits

Upgrade kits are used for retrofitting newer modules into old-style systems.
• 4100-7150 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-592)
• 4100-7151 Master Controller Upgrade with No Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-394)
• 4100-7152 Master Controller Upgrade with 2X40 Display, operator interface and power supply (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-922)
• 4100-7153 Flexible User Interface Display Upgrade (4100ES with 2x40 display to Flexible User Interface display) (743-240)
• 4100-7154 Master Controller Upgrade with Flexible User Interface Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (743-241)
• 4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher) (743-777)
• 4100-9833 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display in One-Bay Beige Enclosure (4020) (742-804)

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

4.6.10 Rack Mount Kits

• 4100-2140 Bay Mounting Kit (742-741)
• 4100-2144 PDM Mounting Kit (742-547)

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

4.6.11 Power Distribution Modules

• 4100-0634 Power Distribution Module 120 V (742-396)
• 4100-0635 Power Distribution Module 220/230/240 V (742-513)

4.6.12 Expansion Bays

• 4100-2300 Non-Audio Expansion Bay (742-839)
• 4100-2301 Expansion Bay Upgrade Kit (742-602)
• 4100-2320 Audio Expansion Bay (742-873)

4.6.13 Expansion Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs

The expansion battery chargers listed here are used with the standard control panels listed above.
• 4081-9306 External 120 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-029)
• 4081-9308 External 220-240 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-030)

4.6.14 Communication Modules

The following communication modules can be added on to 4100ES systems.
• 4100-3102 MAPNET II Interface Module (742-696)
• 4100-3103 MAPNET Isolator Module (742-725)
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card, 2 Loops (743-1442)
• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card, 4 Loops (743-1441)
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) (742-701)
• 4100-6030 Service Modem Module (742-584)
• 4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect (742-403)
• 4100-6032 City Card without Disconnect (742-404)
• 4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card (742-402)
• 4100-6034 Tamper Switch with IDNet IAM (742-648)
• 4100-6036 Physical Bridge (Style 4) (742-702)

page 22 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-6037 Physical Bridge (Class X (Style 7)) (742-703)

• 4100-6038 Dual RS-232 Interface Card (742-704)
• 4100-6039 Modem Bridge (2120) (742-705)
• 4100-6041 DC Powered FSK Modem (2120) (742-707)
• 4100-6042 Communication Line Repeater (2120) (742-708)
• 4100-6043 RS-232/ DC Comm Converter (2120) (742-709)
• 4100-6044 DC Comm/ RS -232 Converter (2120) (742-710)
• 4100-6045 Decoder Module (742-711)
• 4100-6047 Building Interface Card (743-872)
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit (742-714)
• 4100-6052 DACT (742-700)
• 4100-6054 Fiber-Optic Line Driver (2120) (742-715)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (742-841)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (742-619)
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (742-620)
• 4100-6058 Class X (Style 7) Interface Module (DC Comm – 2120) (742-604)
• 4100-6059 Decoder Module (2120) (742-596)
• 4100-6062 TFX Interface (743-278)
• 4100-6065 BMUX Communication Module (743-645)
• 4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet (743-747)
• 4100-6080 DACT Side Mounted (743-1041)
• 4100-6301 4120 SM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card (743-2029)
• 4100-6302 4120 SM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card (743-2030)
• 4100-6303 4120 MM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card (743-2031)
• 4100-6304 4120 MM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card (743-2032)
• 4100-6104 ES Net Network Interface Card
• 4100-6306 ES Net Dual Channel Ethernet Media Card
• 4100-6307 ES Net Dual Channel DSL Media Card
• 4100-6308 ES Net Dual Channel Single-mode Fiber Media Card
• 4100-6308 ES Net Dual Channel Multi-mode Fiber Media Card
• 4100-6310 ES Net Network Interface Card - Flat

4.6.15 Power Supplies

The power supplies listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
• 4100-5101 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-383)
• 4100-5102 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-384)
• 4100-5103 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-385)
• 4100-5111 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-631)
• 4100-5112 System Power Supply (SPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-632)
• 4100-5113 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-633)
• 4100-5115 Expansion NAC Module (XNAC) (742-386)
• 4100-5120 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (742-659)
• 4100-5121 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-660)
• 4100-5122 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-661)
• 4100-5124 TrueAlert Class A Adapter Module (742-662)
• 4100-5125 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (742-628)
• 4100-5126 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-629)
• 4100-5127 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-300)
• 4100-5152 12 V, 2 A Power Option (742-718)
• 4100-5153 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/120 VAC) (2120) (742-719)
• 4100-5154 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/240 VAC) (2120) (742-720)
• 4100-5155 8 A Expansion Power Supply with 4 A Charger 120/240 VAC (2120) (742-517)

page 23 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-0156 8 VDC Converter (742-816)

• 4100-5311 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5313 220/230/240 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5325 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS
• 4100-5327 220/230/240 V 50/60Hz EPS

4.6.16 Signaling Modules

The signaling modules listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
• 4100-5005 8-Zone Module (Class B) (742-655)
• 4100-5015 8-Zone Module (Class A) (742-721)
• 4100-3201 4-Relay Module (2 A) (742-722)
• 4100-3202 4-Relay Module (10 A) (742-723)
• 4100-3203 8-Relay Module (3 A) (742-724)
• 4100-3204 4-Point Relay Module (2 A) (742-948)
• 4100-3206 8-Point Relay Module (3 A) (742-949)

4.6.17 Annunciator Modules

The following annunciator modules are available for the 4100ES.
• 4100-1279 2-inch (51-mm) Blank Display Module (742-519)
• 4100-1280 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-509)
• 4100-1281 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Yellow LEDs) (742-508)
• 4100-1282 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 yellow LED per switch) (742-408)
• 4100-1283 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (2 yellow LEDs per switch) (742-409)
• 4100-1284 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 green LED per switch) (742-407)
• 4100-1285 16-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-507)
• 4100-1286 Hands Off Auto (HOA) Switch Display Card (742-514)
• 4100-1287 24-Switch/24-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-506)
• 4100-1288 LED/Switch Controller Card (742-410)
• 4100-1289 Expansion LED/Switch Controller Card (No mounting plate) (742-626)
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module (742-726)
• 4100-1291 Remote Unit Interface Card (742-727)
• 4100-1292 Remote Command Center (742-737)
• 4100-1293 Panel-Mounted Printer (742-739)
• 4100-1294 LED/Switch Slide-In Label Kit (for up to 3 Bays) (742-863)
• 4100-1295 HOA Module (No Text) with 24 Switches and 24 Red LEDs (742-874)

4.6.18 Transponders and Transponder Components

The following is a list of transponder cabinets and components for the 4100ES.
• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Basic TIC) (742-866)
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Local Mode TIC) (742-867)
• 4100-0620 Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) (742-520)
• 4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser Module (742-534)
• 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser Module (742-535)
• 4100-0625 Local Mode TIC (742-521)
• 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module (742-695)
• 4100-0633 Transponder Cabinet Tamper Switch (742-738)
• 4100-1341 MCC Digital Audio Riser Module (743-850)

4.6.19 Audio Operator Interfaces

The following modules are used only with the 4100U and 4100ES systems.
• 4100-1252 Audio Operator Interface – 1 Channel (742-798)
• 4100-1253 Audio Operator Interface – 1.5 Channel (742-801)

page 24 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-1254 Audio Operator Interface – 2 Channel (742-799)

• 4100-1255 Audio Operator Interface – 3-8 Channel (742-800)

4.6.20 Audio Controller Boards

The following audio controller boards are used with the audio operator interface.
• 4100-1210 Audio Controller Board – Analog, 1.5 Channels (742-517)
• 4100-1211 Audio Controller Board – Digital (742-387)
• 4100-1311 Audio Controller Board – Digital (743-446)

4.6.21 Telephones/Microphones
The following phone and microphone assemblies are used with audio operator interfaces.
• 4100-1270 Master Telephone with Phone Card and 3 NACs (742-865)
• 4100-1271 Remote Master Telephone (742-597)
• 4100-1243 Microphone (742-523)
• 4100-1244 Remote Microphone (742-821)
• 4100-1265 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Master – 743-238)
• 4100-1269 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Slave – 743-306)

4.6.22 Additional Audio Modules

Optional modules for the 4100ES audio system are listed below.
• 4100-0623 Network Audio Interface Module (742-522)
• 4100-1240 Aux Audio Input Board (742-388)
• 4100-1241 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 8 Minute (742-518)
• 4100-1242 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 32 Minute (742-393)
• 4100-1272 Telephone Expansion Card (742-600)
• 4100-1273 Class A Telephone Adapter Module (742-599)
• 4100-1274 Microphone Mux Module (743-808)

4.6.23 Common Audio Options

• 4100-1245 Flex 50 Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (742-540)
• 4100-1246 Flex 50 Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-539)
• 4100-1248 100 Watt Expansion NAC Board with 6 Class B NACs (742-524)
• 4100-1249 100 Watt Class A Adapter (Converts 6 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-543)
• 4100-1259 Constant Supervision NAC 25 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision)
(743-163)
• 4100-1260 Constant Supervision NAC 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision)
(743-164)
• 4100-1266 Expansion Signal Card Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (743-302)
• 4100-1267 Expansion Signal Card Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A (743-303)
• 4100-1268 Expansion Signal Card Constant Supervision NAC Adapter, 25 or 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-
board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-304)
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card with 3 Class B NACs (743-159)

4.6.24 Amplifiers
The following amplifiers are used only in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are not compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option.
100 W Analog Amplifiers:
• 4100-1214 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)
• 4100-1215 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)
• 4100-1216 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)
• 4100-1217 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1218 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1219 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
• 4100-1220 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)

page 25 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-1221 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)

• 4100-1222 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)
• 4100-1223 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1224 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1225 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
100 W Digital Amplifiers (except for 4100-1230 and -1236 [95 W]):
• 4100-1228 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1229 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1230 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1231 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1232 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1233 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
• 4100-1234 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1235 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1236 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1237 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1238 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1239 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1212 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-794)
• 4100-1213 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-795)
• 4100-1261 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-001)
• 4100-1262 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-002)
Digital Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1226 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-796)
• 4100-1227 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-797)
• 4100-1263 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-003)
• 4100-1264 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-004)

Note: The following amplifiers are only used in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC)
option and 4100U Master Firmware Revision 11.08 or later.

100 W Analog Amplifiers:

• 4100-1314 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1315 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1316 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1317 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1318 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1319 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)
• 4100-1320 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1321 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1322 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1323 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1324 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1325 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)
100 W Digital Amplifiers:
• 4100-1328 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1329 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)
• 4100-1330 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)
• 4100-1331 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1332 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1333 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
• 4100-1334 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1335 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)

page 26 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-1336 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)

• 4100-1337 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1338 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1339 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1312 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-436)
• 4100-1313 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-437)
• 4100-1361 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-444)
• 4100-1362 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-445)
Digital Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1326 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-447)
• 4100-1327 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-448)
• 4100-1363 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-455)
• 4100-1364 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-456)

4.6.25 Miscellaneous Modules

The following modules are for 4100ES systems:
• 4100-0650 Battery Shelf (for 50 Ah batteries) (742-840)
• 4100-0640 Memory Add-On Module for Flexible User Interface (743-279)
• 4100-5128 Battery Distribution Terminal Module (742-843)
• 4100-9854 4100U/4100ES Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit (743-856)

4.7 4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U)

This section lists the 4100, non-4100ES/4100U, PIDs that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm System (in retrofit applications). There are two basic
types of PIDs listed here:
• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes:
- offered as after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this book.

4.7.1 System Types and Options

There are six standard types of 4100 control panels used with the 4100. A PID identifies each system type. These PIDs are combined with the more
specific PIDs listed after this topic to meet the requirements of custom installations:
• 4100-8001 Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100-8002 Remote Annunciator Panel
• 4100-8010 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100-8019 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Transponder
• 4100-8201 Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8210 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8901/8909 Add-On to Existing System or Annunciator
• 4100-6050/6051 Power Limited Panel/Non-Power Limited Panel

4.7.2 Master Controller Option Module

4100-6001 240 VAC Controller Power Input

4.7.3 NAC Modules

Notification appliance circuit (NAC) modules are listed below.
• 4100-4001 2-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4011 2-Circuit (Style Z)
• 4100-4321 6-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4331 6-Circuit (Style Z)

page 27 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4.7.4 IDC Modules

Initiating device circuit (IDC) modules are listed below.
See 579-832 for 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart.
• 4100-5004 8-Zone (Style B)
• 4100-5014 8-Zone (Style D)

4.7.5 Optional Modules

Miscellaneous optional modules are listed below.
• 4100-0104 Additional Battery Charger (120 V)
• 4100-0105 5 A Power Supply (120 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0108 Expansion 8 A Power Supply (Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0110 MAPNET II Addressable Module
• 4100-0111 MAPNET II Isolator Module
• 4100-0113 Dual RS-232 Module
• 4100-0114 Additional Battery Charger (240 V)
• 4100-0115 5 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0117 MINIPLEX 8 A Remote Power Supply (Power Limited)
• 4100-0118 8 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0119 2 A Converter (12 VDC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0123 2120 Communications Module (Class X (Style 7))
• 4100-0124 Enhanced Charger Package
• 4100-0129 25.5 V Limiter Module
• 4100-0136 Decoder Module
• 4100-0137 RS-232 Module for 2120 Communications (Class X (Style 7))
• 4100-0139 Service Modem
• 4100-0153 Contact Closure DACT
• 4100-0154 VESDA Interface (Aftermarket Only)
• 4100-0155 Serial DACT
• 4100-0304 Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Module (Class X (Style 7))
• 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer
• 4100-0540 4-20 mA ZAM Modules (2 per plate)
• 4100-1108 8 A Power Supply (120 VAC; Power Limited)

4.7.6 Auxiliary Relay Controls

The following modules are auxiliary relay controls.
• 4100-3001 4-Relay, 2 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3002 4-Relay, 10 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3003 8-Relay, 3 A (with feedback)

4.7.7 Audio Controllers and Amplifiers

The following modules can be used in 4100ES Upgrade/Retrofit applications, but cannot be used with 4100ES audio modules.
• 4100-0210 Single-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0211 Dual-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0212 Triple-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0201 25 VRMS/25 W Audio Amplifier (no Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-0202 25 VRMS/Dual 25 W Audio Amplifier (with Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-1203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)
• 4100-0203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0213 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0207 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0217 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-1207 70 VRMS/90 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)

page 28 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4.7.8 Audio Options

The following options can be used in 4100ES Retrofit/Upgrade systems with 4100 Back Boxes.
• 4100-0204 Microphone and Enclosure
• 4100-0205 Master Telephone
• 4100-0206 Redundant Tone Generator
• 4100-0215 Phone Riser Terminal Block

4.7.9 Annunciation Modules

• 4100-0301 64/64 LED/Switch Controller
• 4100-0302 24-Point I/O Graphic Interface
• 4100-0401 8-LED Display Card (Red Led)
• 4100-0402 16-Point Display Card (Red/Yellow LEDs)
• 4100-0403 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Momentary switches; red LEDs)
• 4100-0404 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one green LED per switch)
• 4100-0405 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one yellow LED per switch)
• 4100-0408 8-Switch/8-LED Annunciator Control Switch Module
• 4100-0450 Remote Panel LCD

4.7.10 Miscellaneous Modules

• 4100-0133 Tamper Switch
• 4100-1010 External Battery Power and Charger

4.7.11 Network Modules

The following modules are intended to be used in a networked 4100 system.
• 4120-6014 Modular Interface Board
• 4120-6023 Physical Bridge (Style 4)
• 4120-6024 Physical Bridge (Class X (Style 7))
• 4120-0142 Wired Media Card
• 4120-0143 Fiber-Optic Media Card
• 4120-0144 Modem Media Card
• 4120-0156 8 VDC Module (provides 3 A from 28 V tap)

4.7.12 System Accessories

• 2080-9047 DACT Communication Cable (14 feet [4 meters]) (733-913)
• 2081-9031 Potted Module for PVCS (740-688)
• 2081-9272 Batteries (6.2 Ah) (112-112)*
• 2081-9274 Batteries (10 Ah) (112-113)*
• 2081-9275 Batteries (18.8 Ah) (112-046)*
• 2081-9276 Batteries (33 Ah) (112-053)*
• 2081-9279 Batteries (110 Ah) (112-123)*
• 2081-9287 Batteries (25 Ah) (112-134)*
• 2081-9288 Batteries (12.7 Ah) (112-133)*
• 2081-9296 Batteries (50 Ah) (112-136)*
• 4190-9803 Replacement Paper for 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer (473-019)
*Or the equivalent.

page 29 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5 Installing FACP Components

This chapter describes installation procedures that apply directly to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) as well as each step of the host panel
installation for both the FACP SPS and the EPS CPU configurations. Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the
types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.

Important:
Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical
Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

5.1 Introduction to the FACP

4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the CPU, operator interface, FACP power supply, the power distribution module, the power distribution
interface, backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires.
The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be
connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.

5.1.1 CPU Bay

Every FACP contains a CPU bay. The CPU bay is equipped with:
• 1 FACP power supply module.
• 1 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard:
- In a standalone or MINIPLEX system the CPU motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it.
- In a networked system a network interface card (NIC) is attached as a second daughter card to the master motherboard
• 1 Power Distribution Interface (PDI) (EPS configuration only):
- There are eight 2-inch slots on the PDI. Slots 1 and 2 are used for aftermarket boards. Slots 3 to 8 are taken up by the FACP Power Supply and
the CPU Master Motherboard.

Table 1: CPU Components

Configuration PDI Card Master Motherboard Card FACP Power Supply

SPS CPU - SPS
RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard 566-938
EPS CPU 8 slots EPS

page 30 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Disassembled CPU Bay Side-View CPU Bay Front-View with Optional 2” Motherboard Cards

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

SR V D

RU I B+

RU I A+
RU I B-

Shield

RU I A-
ND

0V -1
R+

R-

GND
X MIT
R S 232

RTS

CTS
R CV
Port 1
P6

1 2 3

LED1
LED2
LED3

LED4

CPU Master
Motherboard
PDI

1 2 3

Ch a ssis
L + RSRVD L- GND 0V-2
PIEZ O 24C RSRVD
XMI T RT S RCV CT S GND

Optional CPU Master Power Supply

Power Distribution 2“ Motherboards Motherboard
Interface (PDI)
CPU Master (EPS Configuration only)
Daughter Card
FACP Power Supply
(EPS with IDNet 2
card depicted)

Figure 5: The CPU Bay

page 31 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.2 SPS CPU Bay Overview

5.2.1 RUI+ Master Motherboard

The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and the other slot is typically used for 4120 Network, ES Net
network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated
power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.

Network Wired RUI Terminal

Media/RS-232 Block
Terminal Block

RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault
connection to
power supply
(EPS only)

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Earth
COMM Fault LEDs

10POS female 10POS female

PDI Connector
(on back)
CPU Slot
NON ISO
RUI
P5

P6

J5 J7
RUI+
ISO

RUI Isolation
Power
Jumpers - See Note

Network/RS232 Slot Power/COMMS to

Adjacent Bay

RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2 Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block

Figure 6: RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note:
If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-9101 (SCU), 4602-9102 (RCU) or 4602-9150, 4602-7101 (SCU/RCU Graphic Command
Center) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

page 32 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.2.2 Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive
user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.

COMM JUMPER (P1)

SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2

COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/
exec storage (card does not “run”
out of compact flash)

LED1 LED2 LED3

CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,
CONNECTOR TO CPU board is unable to come out of reset.
MOTHERBOARD (P9) Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs
to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.

SERVICE PORT (P5)

SERVICE PORT

BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

Battery
DISPLAY
BAT ON

DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
BAT OFF

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)

ETHERNET CONNECTOR INSERT JUMPER DURING
(J1) RJ45 TYPE BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
RESET (WARM START) COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
SWITCH (SW1)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START

Figure 7: Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

page 33 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.2.3 Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs

The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card's status. These LEDs are used for troubleshooting.

5.2.4 Master Controller Switches

Table 2: Master Controller Switches

Switch Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).
Reset (Warm Start)
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software
(0566-719 only)
controlled reset.
A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
Reset (Warm Start) Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status
(other than 0566-719 Cards) of any points that are in the disabled state.
During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate (previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after
the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card,
CFIG Swap press and hold this button. This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the
system.
(0566-719 only)
Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system. This trouble will not clear until a
new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.
Cold Start During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were
(0566-719 only) previously disabled.

page 34 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.2.5 System Power Supply (SPS)

The SPS is the power source for the CPU. The SPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard, which is distributed to other bays up to 2A
capacity.
The SPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The SPS provides an IDNet
channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender. The SPS also has three
on-board NACs that support reverse polarity or SmartSync supervision.
Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.
The SPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting
per UL 864.
Figure 8 is an illustration of the SPS.

IDNET TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) NAC TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2)

POWER/COMM TO
CPU MOTHERBOARD (P6)

IDNET SHIELD SWITCH

(P2)

CITY/RELAY CARD LEGACY POWER/COMM TO

TROUBLE INDICATION CPU
SWITCH (P3) MOTHERBOARD
(P8)

DEVICE ADDRESS
SWITCH (SW1)

AUXILIARY RELAY BATTERY

TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTORS:
(TB4) P4
P5

AUXILIARY POWER
TERMINAL BLOCK EARTH
(TB3) FAULT
MONITOR
SWITCH (P1)
CITY CARD CITY / RELAY CARD AC
CONNECTOR (P7) MOUNTING AREA CONNECTOR
(bulkhead connector on
steel plate)

Figure 8: System Power Supply (566-071)

page 35 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.3 EPS CPU Bay Overview

5.3.1 The Power Distribution Interface

In the CPU bay and the expansion bays, power and data are distributed via the PDI. The PDI is a wiring board with eight card slots, each of which can
accommodate a 4 x 5 slave card. If legacy motherboards are used, they must be mounted above the PDI using metal standoffs.

Note: Power source jumpers P4 and P5 must be placed in position 2-3 (to the right) for proper operation of an EPS CPU bay.

POWER/COMMS 4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

ASSY 566-084
CONNECTORS
(P1-P3)

POWER SOURCE
JUMPERS
(P4, P5)

AUDIO INTERFACE CONNECTORS (P6, P7)

Figure 9: The Power Distribution Interface (PDI)

5.3.2 RUI+ Master Motherboard

The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and the other slot is typically used for 4120 Network, ES Net
network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated
power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.

page 36 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Network Wired RUI Terminal

Media/RS-232 Block
Terminal Block

RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault
connection to
power supply
(EPS only)

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Earth
COMM Fault LEDs

10POS female 10POS female

PDI Connector
(on back)
CPU Slot
NON ISO
RUI
P5

P6

J5 J7
RUI+
ISO

RUI Isolation
Power
Jumpers - See Note

Network/RS232 Slot Power/COMMS to

Adjacent Bay

RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2 Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block

Figure 10: RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-9101 (SCU), 4602-9102 (RCU) or 4602-9150, 4602-7101 (SCU/RCU Graphic Com-
mand Center) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

page 37 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.3.3 Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive
user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.

COMM JUMPER (P1)

SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2

COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/
exec storage (card does not “run”
out of compact flash)

LED1 LED2 LED3

CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,
CONNECTOR TO CPU board is unable to come out of reset.
MOTHERBOARD (P9) Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs
to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.

SERVICE PORT (P5)

SERVICE PORT

BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

Battery
DISPLAY
BAT ON

DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
BAT OFF

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)

ETHERNET CONNECTOR INSERT JUMPER DURING
(J1) RJ45 TYPE BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
RESET (WARM START) COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
SWITCH (SW1)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START

Figure 11: Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

page 38 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.3.4 Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs

The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card's status. These LEDs are used for troubleshooting.

5.3.5 Master Controller Daughter Card Switches

Table 3: Master Controller Switches

Switch Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).
Reset (Warm Start)
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software
(0566-719 only)
controlled reset.
A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
Reset (Warm Start) Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status
(other than 0566-719 Cards) of any points that are in the disabled state.
During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate (previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after
the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card,
CFIG Swap press and hold this button. This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the
system.
(0566-719 only)
Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system. This trouble will not clear until a
new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.
Cold Start During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were
(0566-719 only) previously disabled.

5.3.6 Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2

The EPS with IDNet 2 is the power source for the CPU and the host cabinet. The EPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard.
The EPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The IDNet 2 card on the EPS
provides one IDNet channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender.
Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.
The EPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting
in accordance with UL 864.
Figure 12 is an illustration of the EPS. See Figure 13 for the IDNet 2 card.

page 39 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Auxiliary/
IDNAC NAC
Terminals

LEDs

Trouble Scroll
Button
A 4 Pin Harness
B
Address C Card Power /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Switch D Comms
E
CH1
RUI+ Earth CH2 Connection
CH3 to PDI
Detect COM

IDNET 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IDNet 2
Card

Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection
to Bridge

Connection to
Batterries
A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

City Card Connection Earth Detect Jumper

Figure 12: EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872)

The 4100-3109 IDNet 2 is a slave card that provides the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with an isolated IDNet channel which contains two isolated
loops.
This card is compatible with IDNet communicating initiating devices and allows the system CPU to communicate with up to 250 peripheral devices,
such as smoke detectors and pull stations.

page 40 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

PDI Connector (P5)

IDNET 2
LEDs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address
Dip Switch
(SW1)

Loop 1
Loop 2 Class A/B
Class A/B Jumper (P1)
Jumper (P2)

A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

IDNet Terminal Block (TB1)

Figure 13: IDNet 2 Card

page 41 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.4 FACP Operator Interface

5.4.1 Operator Interface

The following images show the two operator interfaces which are available with the 4100ES. The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm,
supervisory, trouble and other status via the Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated and user-programmable
keys.
Figure 14 is the standard 2x40 LCD Operator Interface. This model includes a 2 line by 40 character Liquid Crystal Display. Figure 15 is the Flexible User
Interface. This model includes a multi-line Liquid Crystal Display, which can display more information simultaneously.

Figure 14: Operator Interface

Figure 15: Flexible User Interface

page 42 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.5 FACP Expansion Bays

5.5.1 Additional CPU Bay Modules

4100-6030 Service Modem Card. CPU mezzanine card. Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.
4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Provides two UL-listed city connections to the municipal fire department
or other remote supervising station. Contains a hardware disconnect switch to allow for testing without alerting the remote station.
4100-6032 City Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Same as the 4100-6031, but without the disconnect and testing option.
4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card.
4100-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations.
May be installed with the 4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055 Modem Media Card, and/or the
4100-6301/4100-6302/4100-6303/4100-6304 Duplex Fiber Media Cards.
4100-6104 slot type ES Net Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs ES Net networking
operations. May be installed with the 4100- 6306 ES Net Ethernet Media Card, the 4010-6307 ES Net DSL Media Card, 4100-6308 ES Net Single-mode
Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6309 ES Net Multi-mode Fiber Media Card.

5.5.2 Expansion Bays

An FACP always has one CPU bay, but it may have one or two expansion bays as well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the
system might require.

MASTER
CONTROLLER BAY
(always on top)

TWO-BAY
CABINET

EXPANSION
BAY

Figure 16: Expansion Bays

page 43 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.6 FACP Power Requirements

5.6.1 System Power

The FACP is powered primarily by the FACP power supply, which in turn gets its power from the power distribution module (PDM). The AC branch circuit
and the standby battery connect to the PDM. AC and battery power are then distributed to power modules from the PDM via harness.
In expansion bays, the PDM may connect to the following: a secondary system power supply (SPS)*, an extended power supply (EPS) a remote power
supply (RPS), an expansion power supply (XPS), or a 100 W Amplifier.

Note: *The 4100-5111, 4100-5112, 4100-5113 SPS is available for expansion bays only.

INCOMING
SPS AC POWER

AC
BTRY

XPS

BTRY PDM
AC

XPS SPS = System Power Supply

XPS = Expansion Power Supply
PDM = Power Distribution Module
BTRY
AC

BATTERY BATTERY

Figure 17: System Power

Important: AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated branch circuit.

5.6.2 Power Requirements

Table 4: Power requirements

120V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6A each

EPS
220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A each
120V, 60 Hz, 4A each
SPS/XPS/RPS/TPS/100W Amplifier
220/230/240V, 50/60 Hz, 2A each

page 44 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.7 Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

Three different sizes of system back boxes are available, accommodating one, two, or three electronics bays. These back boxes are shipped in
large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system
electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic
bays.

Note:
• Conductor entrance and routing restrictions apply to power-limited systems only.
• All back box PIDs are listed in Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

5.7.1 Specifications
Table 5 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Table 5: Back Box Specifications

Description Height Width Rough Opening

PID Number
Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width
2975-9410/2975-9407/ 55 lb. 20-¾ in. 23-½ in. 26-3/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 21-¼ in. 26 ¼ in.
1 Bay
2975-9438 (25 kg) (527 mm) (597 mm) (670 mm) (670 mm) (540 mm) (667 mm)
2975-9411/2975-9408/ 125 lb. 36-¼ in. 39-1/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 36-¾ in. 26 ¼ in.
2 Bay
2975-9439 (57 kg) (921 mm) (994 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (933 mm) (667 mm)
2975-9412/2975-9409/ 185 lb. 52-1/8 in. 55 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 52 5/8 in. 26 ¼ in.
3 Bay
2975-9440 (84 kg) (1,324 mm) (1,397 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (1,337 mm) (667 mm)
Make sure that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure. The Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit should have
all of the items listed in Table 6.

Table 6: Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit

Quantity Per Back Box

Part Number Description
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box
268-010 Lockwasher (No. 8) 4 8 12
490-011 Washer 4 8 12
426-033 Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.) 4 8 12

5.7.2 Mounting the Back Boxes

Mount the back box as shown in Figure 18. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with four 3/8-inch-diameter x 1-½-inch-long (9.5 mm x 38 mm)
fasteners and four 3/8-inch-diameter (9.5 mm) washers.
• For surface mounting, secure the box to the wall using the tear-drop mounting holes on the back surface.
• For semi-flush mounting, secure the box to the wall studs using the knockouts on the sides of the box. Note that the front surface of the back
box must protrude at least ½ inch (sheet metal door) or 3 inches (plastic door) from the finished wall surface.

Important:
Power-limited systems have back box entrance and routing restrictions for field wiring. Do not locate power-limited wiring in the shaded areas of the
back box shown in Figure 18. These areas are reserved for non power-limited circuitry such as AC power, batteries, and the city connection.

page 45 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

ALIGNMENT MARKERS
FOR WALL STUDS: PANEL
6” (152 mm) FRONT
6 29/32”
4” (102 mm) (175 mm)
24”
(610 mm)
WALL

TOP 16” TOP

(406 mm)

22”
(559 mm)
(ONE USE 4 HOLES TO USE 4 HOLES TO
WALL

BAY) SECURE BACKBOX SECURE BACKBOX

TO THE WALL TO THE WALL

RESERVED
3 17/32” FOR ADDITIONAL
(90 mm)
BATTERIES BACK BOX
5 17/32” (SEE NOTE 6)
(140 mm)

Figure 18: Back Box Installation Diagram

Figure 18 notes:
1. Dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.
2. Use suitable punch when conduit is required. Knockouts are not provided. Locate and create on-site as required during installation.
3. A minimum clearance of 5 inches (127mm) from the hinge side is required to provide a maximum door opening of 90 degrees.
4. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in Figure 18. This area is reserved for non power-limited
devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers,
but is always below and to the right of these barriers.
5. Minimum distance between boxes is 3 ¼ inches (83 mm). Maximum distance between boxes is 10 inches (254 mm).

page 46 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.7.3 Back Box side views

Side view with plastic door attached Side view with metal door attached

WALL
WALL

8 - 5 /16"
11-11/16" (211 mm)
(297 mm)

Figure 19: Height off the wall for Back Box and doors (plastic and metal)

page 47 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.8 Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics

This section describes the process for removing the CPU and equipment bays that come with the system modules from their shipping container and
installing them into the mounted back boxes.
Mounting guidelines:
• The CPU bay must be installed in the top bay of the enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in any bay area within an enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in a 19” E.I.A rack console using an adapter kit.

5.8.1 Mounting the System Electronics Bays

Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays:
1. Disconnect the 734-008 Harness from P1 on the Power Distribution Interface (PDI).
2. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container, and set the screws aside.
3. Remove the shipping studs that secure the bays to the shipping container.

Figure 20: Removing the Shipping Studs

4. Mount the power distribution module (PDM) to the back box as shown in Figure 21. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 7 for
the recommended torque.

Table 7: Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No. 6 7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces (569 to 626 cm/grams)
No. 8 16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces (1 159 to 1 282 cm/grams)

page 48 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 7: Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No. 10 26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces (1 930 to 2 139 cm/grams)

CABINET
STANDOFF

Use spacers TAMPER SWITCH

to secure MOUNTING STUDS
PDM to
PDM
cabinet
COVER

PDM
MOUNTING
AREA

INSULATOR
PDM
CONNECTORS

Figure 21: Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)

5. If provided, mount the tamper switch assembly to the mounting studs as shown in Figure 21. Refer to 4100-Series Tamper Switch Installation
Instructions (579-195).
6. Using the hardware provided with the back box, insert the required number of mounting screws to the right and left support holes in the
back box as shown in Figure 22.
7. Tighten the mounting screws.
Note: Install the mounting screws to within 1/8" from the seated position.
8. Mount the system electronics bay assemblies in the back box by carefully placing the assembly onto the four extended screws in the back
box, allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws.
9. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 7 for the recommended torque.

page 49 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 22: Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly

At this point, the system is ready for system card installation. For information on card installation, refer to the Panels’ installation manual.

Important: Do not apply power to the system at this time.

page 50 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.9 Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)

Trim Kits are used to cosmetically cover wall openings when boxes are mounted semi-flush into the wall. The kit includes:
• Two top trim bands (shorter)
• Two side trim bands (longer)
• Four corner pieces.

Top Trim Bands (x2)

Corner Pieces (x4)

Side Trim Bands (x2)

Figure 23: Semi-Flush Trim Kit

5.9.1 Trim Application

After the back box is mounted to the wall, attach the trim in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Hold the top strip against the top of the back box.
2. Centered the strip on the box width, and mark the end locations (the top bands are approximately 1" (25 mm) shorter than the box width).
Peel off the adhesive tape release, align it with the marks and press down to assure adhesion.
3. Place the second top strip beneath the back box and repeat step 2.
4. The side bands are sized for the 3-bay box, they must be re-sized for use with 1 and 2 bay boxes.
- For use with a 3-bay box: align, mark, and attach as was done for the top and bottom bands.
- For use with a 1-bay or 2-bay boxes, cut the bands approximately 1" (25mm) shorter than the box height (1-bay boxes are 22" (559 mm) high, 2-
bay boxes are 40" (1016 mm) high). Carefully cut them to length using a hacksaw or sharp utility knife.
5. Attach the cut bands using the same procedure as the top and bottom bands.
6. Each corner piece overlaps the trim strip slightly less than 3/4" (19mm). Align the corner pieces tight to the box corner and attach with a
drywall or similar screw, suitable for the wall material (screws are not supplied).

page 51 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Semi-Flush
Mounted
BACK BOX

Figure 24: Applying the Trim

page 52 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.10 Step 4. Mounting the Door

This section describes how to hang and attach glass and solid doors to the back box.
Additionally, this section describes how to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks are on the left.

Grounding
Wires
Door
Hinges

Lock

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

Figure 25: Front and Back View of a Glass Door

Grounding Door
Wires Hinges
Lock

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

Figure 26: Front and Back view of a Solid Door

page 53 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.10.1 Attaching Doors

Read the following instructions to attach glass or solid doors to the back box. Note that the hinges and lock catch should already be attached.

Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.

1. Unscrew the lock catch from the back box and retain the hardware.
2. Flip the lock catch over, and re-attach it to the back box so that the slot now protrudes to the outside of the back box. See Figure 27.

Lock catch
once properly
Lock Catch installed
position upon
reception

Figure 27: Reversing the Lock Catch

3. Remove the door from the packaging.
4. For glass doors:
- Fit the dress panel onto the back box using the grooves on the dress panel as guides.
- Secure the dress panel to the back box using the #6 torx screw provided. See Figure 28.
5. Align the door hinges with the hinge pins on the back box, and slide the door down onto the hinge pins.

Door Hinge

Secure with
#6 Screw

Cabinet Hinge Pin

Figure 28: Securing the Dress Panel

Figure 29: Hinge Pin Alignment
6. Attach the two ground wires to the back box with the # 6 hex flange nuts in the shipping group (the grounding straps should already be

page 54 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

attached to the door). See Figure 30.

Door

Back Box

Ground Wire

Figure 30: The Ground Wire

7. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door and keep it in a safe place.

5.10.2 Reversing the Door

Read the following instructions to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks
are on the left. Be sure to retain all hardware.

Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.

1. Disconnect the ground wires from the back box and set them aside.
2. Remove the door (if attached) by lifting it up off the back box’s hinge pins. Set the door aside.
3. Remove the lock catch and its screws from the right side of the back box.
4. Attach the lock catch to the left side of the back box so that the slot protrudes through the outside of the back box.
5. Use a 1/8 (3mm) punch and hammer to remove the hinge pins from the hinge leaves on the back box.
6. Reinsert the hinge pins so that they face lengthwise toward the bottom of the back box.
7. Remove all hinge hardware from the left side of the back box.
8. Attach the hinge hardware to the right side of the back box, so that the hinge pins are facing toward the top of the back box.
9. Turn the door upside down, align its hinges to the back box hinge pins, and then slide the door down onto the hinge pins.
10. Re-attach the ground-wire and flange nut to the back box and door.
11. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door, and keep it in a safe place.

page 55 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.11 Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay

This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing traditional aftermarket motherboards into the 4100ES
CPU bay.

Note:
• If you do not need to install individual motherboards into the CPU bay, but need to install aftermarket modules into expansion bays, skip to Step
7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays.
• If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 5, you have completed the panel installation
and can apply power using the power-up and power-down procedures.

5.11.1 4100ES CPU Bay Placement Guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines before mounting a motherboard into a CPU bay.
• There are eight 2” (51 mm) slots on the CPU bay. Slots 1 and 2 are the only available slots for aftermarket boards.
• If there are more old style 4100 modules than a CPU bay can accommodate, they should be placed into the next expansion bay.
• For SPS Configuration only: CPU bays do not include a power distribution interface (PDI) board, so this bay is reserved for motherboard/daughter
card modules only.

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

Chassis

2“ Motherboards
CPU Master Power Supply
Motherboard

Figure 31: CPU Bay Card Placement

page 56 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.12 Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays

This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing 4” X 5” cards and traditional motherboards into 4100ES
electronics bays.

Important:
This section applies to aftermarket modules for expansion bays only. If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have fol-
lowed Steps 1 through 6, you have completed the panel installation and can apply AC power.

5.12.1 4100ES Placement Guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines before mounting 4” X 5” cards and/or motherboards to an expansion bay.
• Each expansion bay assembly includes a chassis, two end supports, one LED/switch frame, and a power distribution interface (PDI) board.
• An expansion bay holds up to eight 4” X 5” modules. A double-size module, such as the expansion power supply (XPS), takes up two blocks of
space as shown below.
• Cards must be added from right to left.

Figure 32: Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement

page 57 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.12.2 Motherboard Placement Guidelines for a 4100ES bay

• Motherboards can be installed on top of the PDI in expansion bays. The data and power that would normally be bussed via the PDI is instead
routed across the boards by a connector from one board to the next.
• Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay if no 4” x 5” modules are installed in the bay, and if the pins on the left
connector (usually P1) on the leftmost motherboard are removed.
• Motherboards must be added from left to right.
• Relay motherboards must be the rightmost motherboards.

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

This Slot
4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd
Must
Remain
Empty

Power Distribution
Interface

This slot cannot contain a Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be mounted in an

motherboard unless the pins expansion bay. Seven motherboards fit into Slots 2 through 8; the
on P1 (or leftmost pin eighth can be added in Slot 1 if its leftpost pins are removed.
connector) are removed.

Figure 33: Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement

page 58 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.12.3 Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines

• As shown in Figure 34, motherboards can be installed alongside 4” X 5” cards, if necessary.

Figure 34: Mixed Module Placement

page 59 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.12.4 Installing 4 X 5 Cards

The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4 x 5 slave cards. Since
the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4 x 5 cards.
Use the following instructions and Figure 35 to mount slave cards to an expansion cabinet.
1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These holes must line up with the screw holes in the
card.
2. Plug the card into the appropriate blind mating connector. Seat the card firmly onto the PDI when installing to ensure complete insertion of
the power connector into the PDI.
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

WASHERS
STANDOFFS
SCREW
RETAINERS
4” X 5” CARD

#6 SCREWS

PDI CONNECTOR PDI

(reverse side)

Figure 35: Slave Card/PDI Connection

5.12.5 Installing Motherboards into a 4100ES Expansion Bay

Use the following procedure when installing motherboards in an expansion bay. Start with the second slot from the left and fill to the right.
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Attach four metal threaded standoffs and lockwashers into the screw holes on the chassis.
3. Attach two grey plastic standoffs to the motherboard socket mounting screws.
4. Secure the motherboard to the standoffs using four #6 torx screws as shown below.

page 60 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

METAL
STANDOFFS
SCREW HOLES

PLASTIC STANDOFFS

#6 SCREWS

SCREW HOLES

LOCKWASHERS

Figure 36: Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay

page 61 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.13 Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays

Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in its bay. At the same time, bays in the FACP also have to be connected together. Read this
section to ensure that cards and bays are interconnected.

5.13.1 Guidelines
Review the following guidelines before interconnecting modules and bays.
• The FACP power supply provides 24 VDC power to the CPU motherboard.
• The CPU motherboard provides 8 V (3 A capacity) for use by Legacy 4100 slave cards. 24 VDC card power is routed through the motherboard for
slave card use.
• 4100 internal comms and power are harnessed to other bays. Do not connect the 8 V at P7 to an 8 V converter on a Goldwing or remote interface
card.
• 24 VDC card power from the FACP power supply is rated at 2 A.
• Additional harnesses are provided with the shipping group, but may not be used at the time of installation. These harnesses should remain with
control equipment for future use when necessary.

5.13.2 Power Distribution Module Connections

The power distribution module (PDM) connects to the EPS, SPS, RPS, or XPS in each bay. One PDM is used per back box. Use the instructions below to
properly connect the PDM to each bay.
1. Route the black and white AC power wires to the supplied ferrite bead. Loop the wires twice through the bead as shown in Figure 37.

TO AC BREAKER

TO PDM

Figure 37: Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead

2. Wire 120 VAC to the PDM, keeping AC wires at least 1 inch away from all other wires. AC power must stay in the right side of the cabinet, in
the non-power-limited area.
3. Connect batteries to P5 on the PDM using Harness 734-015. Bend the wire near the PDM so that it occupies the back of the cabinet.
4. Connect the PDM to the power supply using Harness 734-012 for 120 V systems (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions).
- Feed red and black wires through the side rail to the front of the power supply to prevent wire damage when the front panel is inserted.
- Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to plugs P2 (black) and P3 (red) on the EPS and plugs P5 (black) and
P4 (red) on the SPS or RPS.
- Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS,
SPS or RPS assembly, as shown in Figure 38.

page 62 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
Bottom view GROUND
of the EPS assembly 120 V
NEUTRAL
HARNESS
(734-257) BACK BOX
(734-258)* GROUND
SCREW
Bulkhead connector
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248;
BLACK WIRE see below)*
RED WIRE

Second bulkhead HARNESS 733-015

connector here in 120 V TO TRANSFORMER TO 24 V BATTERY
THROUGH BULKHEAD
220/ 230/240 V CONNECTOR
version 566-248
PDM TERMINAL

230 VAC
220 VAC

240 VAC
BLOCK

NEUT
50/60 Hz
2.3 A

Figure 38: FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)

5. Connect the 734-012 Harness (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions) from the next connector on the PDM to the first XPS or EPS.
- Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to the battery plugs on the respective power supplies.
- Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the connector at the bottom of the power supply
assembly, as shown below. The black wire must be closer to the wall at the power supply connection point.
6. Repeat step 5 for the second power supply, if applicable.

Note: AC wiring is supervised.

page 63 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 60 Hz, 4 A

120 V GROUND
NEUTRAL
P1

HARNESS P2

BATTERY (734-012) P3
BACK BOX
HARNESS (734-013)* P4
GROUND
FUSED AT 15 A P5
SCREW
Bulkhead connector

PDM
RED WIRE (566-246)
P5 (or 566-248;
P4 see below)*
BLACK WIRE

XPS
ASSEMBLY HARNESS 734-015
TO 24 V BATTERY
Additional bulkhead
connector supplied here
with 220/230/240 V 566-248

230 VAC
220 VAC

240 VAC
systems PDM TERMINAL

NEUT
BLOCK

50/60 Hz
2A

Figure 39: XPS/PDM Connection

5.13.3 SPS CPU Card Interconnections in the CPU Bay

Use the following directions to connect the CPU to the SPS and other motherboards (refer to Figure 40).
1. Connect the 734-008 harness from P6 Pwr/Comm connector on the SPS to P10 on the RUI+ CPU motherboard.
Note: If a 734-008 or 734-075 Pwr/Comm harness is connected at P6 on the SPS to provide power to additional modules, you must relocate
it to an available 4-pin Pwr/Comm connector within the FACU.
2. Make sure connector P3 on the CPU is secured to J1 on the next motherboard to the left. Repeat this for the third (leftmost) motherboard, if
applicable.

page 64 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.13.4 SPS CPU Card Interconnections in Expansion Bays

Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to
Figure 42).
The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since
the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays for instructions on mounting 4” X 5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following
variations:
• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to
Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU. Refer to Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.

5.13.5 SPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system,
or as a node on a network.
Generally, the CPU bay connects to a local expansion bay using a circuit from CPU to the expansion bay’s PDI. If there is a second expansion bay, the
PDI on the first expansion bay connects to the PDI on the second.

Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is
the case.
• To connect from the CPU bay to an expansion bay, route the 734-008 Harness from P2, P3, or P4 on the CPU motherboard to P1 on the PDI in the
adjacent bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers
P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3 (right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay.
Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.
Figure 40 shows the interconnections between three bays in a host panel.

J1/P3

P1 (566-227 motherboards 733-996

only) HARNESS
(566-227 motherboards only)

P6

P8

P10 0734-008 Harness

P2 (used with 566-938 RUI+
HARNESS P3 CPU Motherboards only)
734-008 P4

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

P1 ASSY 566-084

P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

P1 ASSY 566-084

P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

Figure 40: Bay-to-Bay Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix K: Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U).

5.13.6 EPS CPU Bay Interconnections

For the New Configuration:
• The FACP power supply and the CPU master motherboard are connected through the PDI board.
• Connect the power supply’s “RUI+ Earth Detect” (P9 on the EPS card) to the Earth Fault (P1) on the RUI+ CPU Motherboard card.

page 65 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• To connect the RUI+ CPU Motherboard to adjacent cards that do not communicate through the PDI (2” motherboards for example), insert a male-
male 10 pin header into the Motherboards’s female ten pin header (J8) and insert the other end into the adjacent card.

5.13.7 EPS CPU Interconnections in Expansion Bays

Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to
Figure 42).
The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since
the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X 5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following
variations:
• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to
Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”

5.13.8 EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system,
or as a node on a network.
• The CPU bay can be connected to a local expansion bay by connecting the P2 or P3 connector on the left end of the CPU PDI card to the
expansion bay’s PDI P1 connector.
• Figure 41 shows a typical interconnect using P2 on the CPU PDI to P1 of the first expansion bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4
and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3 (right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (EPS, SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay.
Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.

Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the
case.
Figure 41 shows the basic CPU interconnections in a 4100ES EPS FACP.

page 66 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

RUI+ MOTHERBOARD
566-938
EPS PCB 566-873

P1
P2
P3

CPU BAY TO
EXPANSION BAY
HARNESS (734-008)
P2

CPU BAY P3

P1
P2
P3

EXPANSION BAY PDIs

P1
P2
P3

Figure 41: Basic CPU Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix K: Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U).

page 67 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.13.9 Connecting to 4100 Motherboards

Panels with motherboards on the left side of the expansion bays require some non-PDI connections. If you need to connect a harness to a
motherboard, refer to Figure 42 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the 733-525 Harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay. If the adjacent bay is a CPU bay with no additional
motherboards, connect the harness to the P8 and P7 connectors of the CPU motherboard.
- Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P8 connector. Note that the P8 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
- Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P7 connector. Note that the P7 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay or a CPU bay with additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the
motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If 4100-6052 DACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the
second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
- Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
- Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the
left side of the bay.
- Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
- Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

page 68 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Blue

White

Harness

Chassis

Connector with
Blue Wire Goes
to P2

Connector with
White Wire Goes
to P3

Figure 42: Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

page 69 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.14 Step 8. Configuring Cards

The all cards and modules in the CPU FACP back box must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This
section describes the hardware configuration for the CPU components.

5.14.1 RUI+ Master Motherboard Configuration

The CPU motherboard must be jumpered as follows (refer to Figure 10):
RUI+ Isolation:
By default the RUI channel of the RUI+ Master motherboard is set to isolated mode. This provides better noise immunity in larger systems. If you
are using an RUI+ Master Motherboard to connect to a 4602-9101 (SCU), 4602-9102 (RCU) or 4602-9150/4602-7101 (SCU/RCU Graphic Command
Center), move jumpers P5 and P6 to the RUI NON ISO position.

P5 and P6
Position 1-2: RUI is isolated (default)
Position 2-3: RUI is not isolated (use for RCU/SCU compatibility)

SW1 and SW2 are used to set the CPU motherboard up to be attached to either a network card or a RS-232/2120 card.
• On: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• Off: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

Note:
SW1: (Top) ON is to the left.

SW2: (Bottom) On is to the right.

5.14.2 Master Controller Daughter Card Configuration

The master controller daughter card must be jumpered as follow (refer to Figure 6):
P1 is used for engineering diagnostics (COMLAB).
• Position 1 – 2: Download or no connection.
• Position 2 – 3: Diagnostic mode.
P3 configures the RAM battery as ON or OFF.
• Position 1 – 2: ON.
• Position 2 – 3: OFF.

5.14.3 SPS Configuration

SW1: Using DIP switch SW1, set the SPS device address. Use the address table in Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch.
P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.
Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor
for earth faults. If there is a second SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power
modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to
monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.
P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards
P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.
P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in pos. 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation

Note: Refer to The System Power Supply (SPS) for additional SPS configuration information. Refer to EPS with IDNet 2 for SPS wiring information.

page 70 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.14.4 EPS Configuration

SW2: Use this switch to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer [Link] the address table in Appendix A: The Device Configuration
DIP Switch.
P18: The Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable positive and negative Earth Fault detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
P16: The Battery Disconnect jumper can be set so that the FACP shuts down if the battery levels are too low, instead of letting the system run with
diminished capacities. Enabling this function is mandatory for FACPs installed in Canada.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2

5.14.5 PDI Configuration

P4/P5: The PDI can be configured to draw its power from different sources via P4 and P5.
• To provide power to the EPS CPU bay, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2-3.
• To draw power from an XPS, SPS, RPS, TPS, or EPS on the PDI, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2 – 3.
• To draw power from P1 (from the XPS, TPS, EPS, SPS or RPS), set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 1 – 2 (default).
• To remove power from the PDI, remove the jumper from P4.

5.14.6 Configuring Other Cards

Refer to the appropriate installation instructions to configure other cards that are located in CPU and expansion bays. Refer to Appendix D:
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions for a list of publications.

5.15 Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries

5.15.1 Installing and Removing Batteries in a One Bay Cabinet

To install the batteries:
1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.
2. Tilt the first battery towards you and insert it into the space at the bottom of the cabinet.
3. Once inside the cabinet, tilt the battery back to an upright position and slide it to the right of the cabinet.
4. Repeat the proceeding two steps with the second battery and make sure it is snugly positioned beside the first battery.
5. Once both batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.
6. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:
- Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.
- Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.
- Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.
7. Power up the panel following the instructions in Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures.
To remove the batteries:
1. Power Down the Panel following the instructions in Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures.
2. Remove the harness from the batteries.
3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet by tilting them towards you, then taking them out of the cabinet.
5. Dispose of the old batteries properly.

page 71 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Negative
Positive

Jumper

Figure 43: One Bay Battery Installation

page 72 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.15.2 Installing and Removing Batteries in a Multi-Bay Cabinet

To install the batteries:
1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.
2. Place the batteries at the bottom of the cabinet, center them and gently push them against the back wall.
3. Once the batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.
4. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:
- Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.
- Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.
- Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.
5. Power up the panel following the instructions in Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures.
To remove the batteries:
1. Power Down the Panel following the instructions in Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures.
2. Remove the harness from the batteries.
3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet.
Dispose of the old batteries properly.

Negative
Positive

Jumper

Figure 44: Multi-Bay Battery Installation

page 73 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.16 Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures

5.16.1 System Power Up Procedure

Important:
• Never connect or disconnect power on a 4100ES by removing the connector from the PDM. This could cause an improper order of power
disconnection which may shorten the product life.
• If this procedure is not followed, you may cause damage to the system and/or create a shock hazard.
Power-Up Procedure:
1. Connect only the negative (black) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
2. Close and lock the front panel door.
3. Have the appropriate personnel apply AC power to the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect.
4. Ensure the panel has started properly, observing all safety procedures appropriate for a system with AC power applied.
5. Open the panel door and acknowledge all abnormal conditions including the battery disconnected trouble condition.
6. Connect the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
7. Ensure the battery trouble has cleared.
8. Install the panel cover plate (when present), close and lock the door.

5.16.2 System Power Down Procedure

Warning:
• Use caution when handling batteries - they can store significant energy and present a shock hazard. When transporting used batteries, be certain
the terminals are removed and/or insulated so they cannot make contact with conductive objects and create a safety hazard.
• Use caution when AC power is present. The panel must have power removed while you are performing service on the system.
Power-Down Procedure:
1. Unlock and open the panel door and remove the cover plate (when present), observing appropriate safety procedures and warnings when
the system has AC power present
2. Disconnect only the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger from the battery
3. Have appropriate personnel remove AC power from the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect
4. Mark or tag the circuit breaker or fused disconnect indicating it is off for service

5.16.3 The Terminal Block Utility Module

The 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module is an all-purpose terminal block that mounts to an electronics bay, above or below the power distribution
interface (PDI). Each module utilizes one block of mounting space.
The terminal block utility module has two 16-position terminal blocks that accept up to a maximum of 12 AWG wire.

page 74 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5.16.4 Mounting to the Electronics Bay

Follow the directions below to mount the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay.
1. Align the terminal block utility module to any two compatible screw holes on the electronics bay. Position the higher terminal block towards
the middle of the bay. There are eight possible locations: four above and four below the PDI. Refer to Figure 45.
2. Secure the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay with two #6 screws and lockwashers.
3. The shorting strip may be removed or modified, depending on the application.

SCREW HOLES FOR

MODULE BRACKET

SCREW HOLES FOR

MODULE BRACKET

TERMINAL BLOCK UTILITY MODULE

#6 SCREW AND LOCKWASHER

Figure 45: Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting

page 75 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

6 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX transponder interface cards (TICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This
chapter describes the transponder installation procedure for 4100ES MINIPLEX systems.

6.1 Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders

The 4100ES MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a standalone cabinet (see Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX
Components), plus:
• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A transponder interface card (TIC) in each transponder cabinet
This section describes each component.

6.1.1 Transponder Cabinets

RUI Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to a transponder interface card (TIC) in a remote transponder cabinet. The
transponder cabinet is simply a 2975-94xx Back Box with at least one TIC module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

6.1.2 Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) and Audio Riser Modules

The following TICs, audio risers, and audio riser controller modules are available for 4100ES MINIPLEX ® systems:
• Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) Module
• Local Mode TIC Module
• Analog Audio Riser Module
• Digital Audio Riser Module
• Network Audio Riser Controller Module
Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) receive data from 4100ES host panels allowing remote locations to perform fire alarm functions. TIC modules are
optionally available with local mode operation that provides basic (degraded mode) system functions in the event of a communication loss with the
master panel. TICs receive communications from the 4100ES host panel using Remote Interface (RUI) communications with either Style 4 or Class X
(Style 7) wiring.
For audio systems, audio riser modules are required and are connected directly to TIC modules via ribbon cable. Audio riser modules support Class A
and Class B analog wiring, as well as Style 4 and Class X (Style 7) digital audio wiring.

6.1.3 Basic TICs

The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, and a port for connecting to other transponder
modules.
The basic TICs use the same board, with some variations:
• The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains RUI outputs, an audio riser output, a user interface output, and a port for connecting to
motherboards.
• The only connectors on the addressable network audio interface module are the audio riser output and a user interface output.

6.1.4 The Local Mode TIC

The local mode TIC contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, port for connecting to other transponder modules, and terminal block for
connecting to an optional Local Mode Controller. Local Mode Controllers are mounted remotely from the transponder and are available in red or
beige (flush or surface mount). Model numbers are 4601-9108, 4601-9109, 4601-9110, and 4601-9111. Installation instructions are supplied with the
controller.
Local mode operation allows a TIC to provide life safety operations in the event of a communication loss with the master controller. More specifically,
this provision means that fire alarm inputs and outputs within the transponder cabinet can still work in a limited capacity to allow continued
functioning of local initiating devices and notification appliances connected to the TIC. Local mode is considered a “degraded” mode of operation
because full fire alarm system functionality is not guaranteed.
Because the TIC is a slave module that occupies an RUI address, it can indicate a trouble condition to the master controller in the event of a hardware
failure. When local mode is initiated, all slave devices locally connected to the TIC are notified by the TIC that local mode is taking effect. From that point
until communication is restored to the master controller, the TIC “group-polls” all connected local slaves, and the slaves respond only in the event of an
alarm input activation. Other status changes, including troubles, are not reported.

6.1.5 TIC Audio Risers

Audio risers are used when digital or analog audio is being transmitted to the transponder cabinet. They are always mounted directly beneath the TIC,
on the leftmost side of the transponder bay.

page 76 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation instructions to obtain configuration information for 4100-0621,
4100-0622, and 4100-1341 Audio riser modules.

6.1.6 TIC Illustrations

Figure 46 is an illustration of the various TIC and audio riser circuit boards (0566-1166 basic TIC, 0566-1167 local mode TIC, 4100-0621 analog audio
riser, 4100-0622 digital audio riser, 4100-1314 MCC digital audio riser).

BASIC TIC LOCAL MODE TIC

ANALOG AUDIO DIGITAL

RISER AUDIO RISER
MCC
DIGITAL AUDIO
RISER

Figure 46: Transponder Interface Cards

6.1.7 Local Mode Specifications

Local Mode is supported by the following:
• 4100-3101, 4100-3104, 4100-3105 IDNet Card
• 4100-3106 IDNet Quick Connect Card
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card

page 77 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card

• 4100-5101 , 4100-5103 Expansion Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5111 , 4100-5113 System Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5125 , 4100-5127 Remote Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5120, , 4100-5122 TrueAlert Power Supply NACs
• 4100-1214 to 4100-1225, 4100-1228, 4100-1229, 4100-1230, 4100-1231, 4100-1232, 4100-1233, 4100-1234, 4100-1235, 4100-1236, 4100-1237,
4100-1238, 4100-1239, 4100-1314, 4100-1315, 4100-1316, 4100-1317, 4100-1318, 4100-1319, 4100-1320, 4100-1321, 4100-1322, 4100-1323,
4100-1324 4100-1325, 4100-1328, 4100-1329, 4100-1330, 4100-1331, 4100-1332, 4100-1333, 4100-1334, 4100-1335, 4100-1336, 4100-1337,
4100-1338, 4100-1339 100W Amplifier NACs
• 4100-1212, 4100-1213, 4100-1226, 4100-1227, 4100-1312, 4100-1313, 4100-1326, 4100-1327 Flex 50 Amplifier NACs.
• 4009-9401 TrueAlert Addressable Controller
• 4100-1270 Phone Controller and 4100-1272 4100-1273 Phone NAC cards
• 4009-9201 4009-9301 IDNet NAC Extender
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card
• 4100-6077 MX Digital Loop Card
Local Mode is NOT supported by, but can co-exist with, the following:
• 4100 Legacy cards
• 4100-3101, 4100-3102, 4100-3103 Auxiliary Relay cards
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit
• 4100-6043 4100-6044 RS-232/2120 Interfaces
• 4100-1280 to 1287 LED/Switch Annunciators
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module
• 4602-9101 SCU/ 4602-9102 RCU
• 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• 4100-1210 4100-1211, 4100-1311 Audio Controller Board
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card
• 4100-6052 DACT
• 4100-3115 XA Loop Interface Card
• 4100-6065 BMUX COMMs Module
• 4100-6066 TFX Loop Interface
Bear in mind the following limitations when local mode is in effect:
• If an alarm is already activated when local mode is initiated, the alarm remains activated in local mode.
• Software zones are not supported. Basic TrueAlert channels are supported.
• Alarm verification is not supported. All alarms are reported immediately.
• SMPL is not supported.
• TrueAlarm sensors have fixed thresholds.

6.1.8 LEDs
The TICs have the following LEDs:
LED1. Illuminates to indicate communication loss with the CPU.
LED2. Illuminates when an RUI ground fault search is active.
LED3. Illuminates when Local Mode is active.
LED4. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Class X (Style 7) primary trouble.
LED5. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Class X (Style 7) secondary trouble.

Note:
• Refer to Figure 46 to see which LEDs are included on which TIC. Most TICs do not contain all LEDs.
• Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation instructions, to obtain LED information for 4100-0621,
4100-0622, and 4100-1341 audio riser modules

6.1.9 Card Specifications

Table 8 lists the specifications for all TICs.

page 78 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 8: Electrical Specifications

Specification Rating
Input Voltage 18-33 VDC
Output Voltage 8 V @ 1 A; 100 mV p-p ripple
Input Current 36 mA for all TICs. 82 mA for a local mode TIC connected to a local mode controller.

Table 9: Environmental Specifications

Specification Rating
Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90°F (32°C)

6.2 MINIPLEX System Guidelines

The following rules apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100ES system.

6.2.1 Guidelines
• All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) and 12 AWG (maximum).
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module inside an UL-Listed electrical box wherever wire enters or exits
the building. A maximum of four 2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel. The 2081-9044 is rated for 200 mA (maximum).
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The total maximum cable load (including all “T” taps) is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance
from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 or Class X (Style 7) operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.
• RUI comms are wired to remote cabinets from the CPU motherboard to one of the following transponder interface cards: 4100-0620 or
4100-0625.
• Annunciators and transponder interface cards support Class X (Style 7) operation when the system is wired Class A.
• The master control panel must be a 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel.
• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100ES Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different
wiring requirements (such as using a Class X (Style 7) RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 transponders can be controlled from the 4100ES Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• A maximum of 30 RUI devices between each TIC is supported.
Note: Old legacy, basic, and local mode TICs have been replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards listed below are function-
ally equivalent to the legacy boards.

Table 10: Replacement boards

Name Legacy Card New Card

Basic Transponder Interface Card 0566-093 0566-1166
Local Transponder Interface Card 0566-094 0566-1167

6.3 Configuring Cards

The TIC and all other cards to be mounted in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays must be configured to operate correctly in the
system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. The CPU motherboard may have to be configured as well.

6.3.1 TIC Configuration

The TIC must be assigned a device address via DIP switch SW1. Refer to Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch for the address switch
table.

page 79 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

6.3.2 Configuring Other Cards

Refer to the appropriate publication to configure other cards that are located in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays.

6.4 TIC/Riser Mounting

All TICs and audio riser cards are mounted like any 4 x 5 card. This section describes the TIC/audio riser card mounting procedure, which is identical to
that of other 4 x 5 cards.

6.4.1 Mounting Instructions

Use the following instructions and Figure 47 to mount 4 x 5 slave cards to an expansion cabinet.

Important:
• The TIC must be mounted in the upper left position of the bay.
• The audio riser card must be mounted directly below the TIC.

1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These holes must line up with the screw holes in the
card. See Figure 47.
2. Plug the card into the top left PDI connector (P8).
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

WASHERS

SCREW STANDOFFS
RETAINERS

TIC CARD

#6 SCREWS

PDI CONNECTOR PDI

(reverse side)

Figure 47: TIC Mounting

page 80 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

6.5 TIC/Motherboard Interconnections

6.5.1 Interconnections
Use Figure 48 to connect the TIC to a motherboard in another bay.
RUI
TMPR SW PRI SEC
24C INPUT SHLD

TB2
P6
TB3

LED4 LED5 POWER/

SW1
SPS COMM

HARNESS OR
734-078 4100
COMM
LOSS
LED1

LED2
TIC RPS
RUI
G.F.
SEARCH

P1

P1
P3

AUDIO RISER CARD

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

PDI 1
ASSY 566-084

HARNESS
734-008

Connectors with
Blue Wire go to P2

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

ASSY 566-084

PDI 2

PDI Jumpers
P4 and P5 on the PDI must be configured to provide power to the TIC.
HARNESS 733-525
--- If there is a Power Supply in Bay 1,
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 2 and 3.
--- If there is no Power Supply in Bay 1 with the TIC, you must obtain
power from Bay 2 or Bay 3.

Connectors with
Option 1
White Wire go to P3 • Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to Power/Comm
plug on the SPS or RPS (P6) (or P2 on XPS) located in
Bay 2 or Bay 3. Connect the other end of the harness to
P1 in Bay 1.
Option 2
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 to Positions 2 and 3 in bay with
power supply that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1.
• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to P2 or P3 in bay
that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1. Connect the
other end of the harness to P1 in Bay 1.

Figure 48: Transponder Cabinet Interconnections

page 81 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

6.6 RUI Wiring

The TIC connects to the CPU via the RUI interface. Wire from the RUI interface to each TIC. The wiring may be Class A or Class B.

6.6.1 RUI/RUI+ Specifications

• Output: 24V @ 130mA (RUI), 500 mA (RUI+); 32V maximum (RUI); 25.2V max (RUI+).
• Data Rate: 9,600 bits per second.
• 35.5 ohms maximum wiring impedance; 2500 feet maximum wiring distance.
• Refer to 900-408 for additional RUI/RUI+ wiring specifications.

6.6.2 Wiring Configurations

Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A
wiring requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each TIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A.
Figure 49 depicts both types of wiring.

Figure 49: TIC Wiring to the Host Panel

Figure Notes:
1. Wire size must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
2. The maximum wiring distance is 2,500 feet (762 m).
3. The maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
4. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.
5. Do not loop wires under terminals.
6. Shielded wire is optional if the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used.
7. Twisted wire is required for RUI. Unshielded twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity for RUI+.

6.7 MINIPLEX Audio Wiring

This section describes the Class A and Class B connections from audio controllers to audio risers, as well as the TIC/riser interconnection. Class A and
Class B wiring configurations are shown for both analog and digital controllers and risers.

6.7.1 Analog Interconnections

Figure 50 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to analog audio risers that are in turn connected to TICs or the
Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

page 82 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Note: Old legacy 0566-218 Analog Audio Controller was replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement board is the 0566-1011 Analog
Audio Controller. It is functionally equivalent to the legacy board.

Node 1 Node 2
Miniplex Node 2 Miniplex
Transponder Control Panel Transponder
1 10
SAA SAA

RISER 1 RISER 2
TB1 4100-0620 4100-0623 4100-0620
4100-1210 BASIC TIC AUDIO RISER BASIC TIC
ANALOG CONTROLLER
AUDIO OR 4100-0625 MODULE OR 4100-0625
CONTROLLER LOCAL LOCAL
MODE TIC MODE TIC

Host Panel
HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS
733-997 733-997 733-997
DASHED
LINES ARE P3 P3 P3
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION P2 P2 P2

4100-0621 4100-0621 4100-0621

ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-242) (566-242) (566-242)

RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1

SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI
TB1 S S TB1 S S TB1 S S
1 10 1 10 1 10

Figure 50: Analog Audio Interconnections

Note:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Over voltage protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160 .
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

6.7.2 Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

Figure 51 is an illustration of Class X (Style 7) and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital audio controller to risers connected to TICs or the
Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Note: Old legacy 0566-409 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-407 DARIC, and 0566-833 MCC DARIC boards were replaced due to component obsoles-
cence. The replacement boards are the 0566-1028 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-1000 DARIC, and 0566-1001 MCC DARIC. They are functionally equiv-
alent to the legacy boards.

page 83 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

PRIMARY
DAR

Transponder 1 Transponder 2

6 1
+ -SS+ -
TB2 PRI SEC

FERRITE
BEAD
(required on 4100-1311
primary and 4100-0625
DIGITAL 4100-0620
secondary LOCAL
AUDIO BASIC TIC
DAR) MODE TIC
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)
Host Panel

HARNESS P3 HARNESS P3
733-997 733-997

P2 P2

Loop wires once through the

supplied ferrite beads as shown
4100-0622 4100-0622
DIGITAL DIGITAL
DASHED LINES ARE AUDIO AUDIO
FOR CLASS X (STYLE 7) RISER RISER
OPERATION (566-407, -1000)
(566-407, -1000)

SEC PRI SEC PRI

TB1 -+S -+ TB1 -+S -+
1 6 1 6

Figure 51: Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

Note:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG, twisted-pair.
2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters)
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:
- 18 AWG : 40 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
- 24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of four
overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 µF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a non-
synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.

page 84 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7 4120 Networking
A standalone or MINIPLEX 4100 system becomes a network node when a 4100 Network Interface Card (NIC) or other compatible network card is
installed and connected to another network node.
This chapter describes each step of how to how to turn a standalone or MINIPLEX FACP into a network node.
Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages for a detailed description of network cards and the media cards that mount onto them.

7.1 Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card

The Network Interface Card (NIC) is a slave card that uses the standard 4100 serial bus to communicate with the master. The NIC connects FACPs in a
network, allowing for communication between each panel via fiber, modem, or twisted shielded pair wire in a Class X (Style 7) wiring configuration.
The NIC is designed to be connected in a point-to-point arrangement, so that one wire fault does not cause the entire system to fail. The point-to-point
arrangement provides the most secure and fault-tolerant wiring possible.
Two types of media boards can be used with the NIC card.
• The Fiber-Optic Media Card can be used for electrically noisy environments or for connecting externally to other buildings.
• Non-4100ES/4100U only: the Modem Media Card is typically used when a large transmission distance is required.
• The Wired Media Card is used in all other types of applications.
Up to two media boards can be plugged into each NIC. The same NIC can use a combination of two types of media boards (for example, a NIC may
have a wired media card connected to port 1 and a fiber-optic media card connected to port 2).

page 85 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.1.1 Network Module Illustrations

Figure 52 depicts the 4100-6078 Network Interface Card.

DATA TRANSMIT/
RECEIVE LEDs
(LED2 THROUGH
LED5)

MEDIA CARD
40-PIN
CONNECTORS
(P5, P6)

DATA RATE JUMPER

PORT (P3)

DATA
PROTOCOL
JUMPER PORT
(P3)
MOTHERBOARD
ADDRESS DIP CONNECTOR (P4)
SWITCH (SW2)

YELLOW LED
(LED1) DIAL-UP
SERVICE
MODEM
RESET SWITCH CONNECTOR
(SW1) (P2)

Figure 52: 4100-6078 Network Interface Card

7.1.2 NIC Card LED Indications

The 4100-6078 NIC has the following LEDs:
LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when
• The host 4100 requests it to illuminate
• A transmission fails
• It is off-line with the 4100 host
• It needs to be configured
LED2 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the right port.
LED3 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the right port.
LED4 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the left port.
LED5 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the left port.

page 86 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.1.3 4100 Motherboard Options

The figures below are illustrations of two motherboards apart from the default CPU motherboard that can be used with the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-274 Master Motherboard holds two daughter cards: the 4100 master controller card and the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-275 Class B Motherboard holds the 4100 NIC by itself.

CITY CONNECT
FIELD WIRING JUMPERS (P4)
TERMINAL UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS 2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2)

P5
P6 FIELD WIRING
INTERNAL COMMS
POWER/COMM BUS SYSTEM POWER TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P2)
CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3) BLOCK (TB2)

P7 P8

Figure 53: UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (J1)
BLOCK (TB1)

INTERNAL COMMS POWER/COMM BUS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING

CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3) TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)

Figure 54: UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

7.1.4 NIC Card Modules

There are seven modules that can be plugged into the 4100-6078 NIC:
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (565-261 or 566-376 or 746-109)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (565-413)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)
• 4100-6301 4120 SM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card (566-1198)
• 4100-6302 4120 SM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card (566-1197)
• 4100-6303 4120 MM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card (566-1199)
• 4100-6304 4120 MM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card (566-1200)
Each module is shown below.

page 87 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Fiber-optic data assembly

Fiber Optic Data: Fiber 565-261 and 566-376:
for 746-109:
Transmit/Receive (U1) Transmit (U1), Receive (U2)
Transmit, Receive

566-1197, 566-1198, 40-pin

566-1199, or 566-1200 network interface
card connector (J1)

Figure 55: 4100-6301/4100-6302/4100-6303/4100-6304 4120 Duplex Fiber

Media Cards, 4100-0143 /4120-0143 / 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card

RESERVED (TB1) 40-PIN NETWORK

R1 P2 INTERFACE CARD
CONNECTOR (P1)

Figure 56: The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413)

page 88 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

MODEM TYPE RJ-11

JUMPER PORT CONNECTOR
(P5) (P3)

RS-232
40-PIN NETWORK
CONNECTOR
INTERFACE CARD
(P1) (USED FOR
CONNECTOR (J1)
PHYSICAL
BRIDGE)
DATA
TRANSMISSION
JUMPER PORT
(P4) STATUS LEDs (LED1, LED2)

Figure 57: The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)

7.1.5 Requirements and Limitations

Refer to Table 11 for electrical environmental requirements for the 4100 NIC and media cards.

Table 11: Electrical and Environmental Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Network Interface Card Startup, no media cards: 8 VDC @ 110 mA
565-516 Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 0 mA
Network Interface Card 566-793 Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 46 mA
Modem Media Card 5 VDC @ 180 mA max.
Dual Fiber Media Card Using 24 V power supply: 20 VDC @ 140 mA max.
(565-261, 566-376, 746-109) Using 5 V power supply : 5 VDC at 130 mA max.
Duplex Fiber Media Card Using 24 V power supply: 24 VDC at 55mA max.
(566-1197, 566-1198, 566-1199, 566-1200) Using 5 V power supply (GCC/NPU): 5 VDC @ 220 mA max.
Wired Media Card 4.75 to 5.25 VDC @ 170 mA max.
Environmental Specifications (All Modules)
Operating Temperature 32° F to 120 °F (0°C× to 49°C)
Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 oF (32 °C)

7.2 Step 1. Configuring Network Cards

The NIC card, along with the each media card, all have jumpers that must be set as shown below.

7.2.1 Motherboard Jumper Settings

NIC-compatible jumper settings on CPU motherboards depend on which motherboards are used.
Motherboard 565-274 (Figure 54):
• JW1 and JW2 must be installed.
• Jumper plugs P5-P8 must not be installed.
Motherboard 566-227 (Figure 54):
P6: Port 1 settings.
P5: Port 2 settings.
• P6/P5 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• P6/P5 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.
RUI+ Master Motherboard 566-938 (for figure see Installing FACP Components):
P10: Port 1 settings.
P11: Port 2 settings.

page 89 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• P10/P11 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).

• P10/P11 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

7.2.2 NIC Card Address Setting

Use SW2 to set the NIC card address. Refer to Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch for the address table.

7.2.3 NIC Card Jumper Settings

There are two shunt jumper ports on the NIC card that need to be set: P3 and P4. (Figure 52)
P3: Determines the NIC data transmission rate, 57.6 kbits/second or 9600 bits/second.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 57.6 kbits/second.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 9600 bits/second.
P4: Determines the data protocol, 8-bit or 9-bit, that the NIC card is using.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 9-bit.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 8-bit.
All settings are labeled on the card.

7.2.4 Wired Media Card Jumper Settings

P2: Tells the system which wire type is to be used. (NIC Card Modules)
Positions 1 – 2, 5 – 6, and 7 – 8: 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wiring.
Remove all jumpers to specify 24 AWG twisted pair telephone cable wiring.

Important:
When using the wired media card, the Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. Remove R1 (1 Ohm resistor) from the media card on the
right port.

7.2.5 Modem Media Card Jumper Settings

Non-4100ES/4100U only. P4 and P5 on the modem media card tell the system how the card is being used. (NIC Card Modules):
P4: Sets the card up as a network media card or a standalone modem.
• Position 1 – 2 (required): Sets the card up as a network media card, a service modem, or a physical bridge.
• Position 2 – 3: Sets the card up as a stand-alone modem.
P5: Specifies which connector will be used for data transmission.
• Position 1 – 2: For modem media board or stand-alone modem. Specifies that the transmission data comes from the 40-pin connector (J1).
• Position 2 – 3: For service modem or physical bridge. Specifies that the transmission data comes from the 10-pin RS-232 connector (P1).

7.2.6 Dual Fiber Media Jumper Settings (746-109 only)

JW1 is used to adjust the link power budget. If communication problems are encountered, make sure that the fiber connections comply with ANSI/TIA/
EIA 568-B-3 industry standards. The low power setting is preferred for all 62.5um fiber links less than 11dB and 50um fiber links less than [Link].
Link Power Budget Settings (62.5um fiber/50um fiber):
Low 11dB / 6.6 dB
Med 16 dB /11.6 dB
High 20.4dB / 17 dB

7.2.7 Duplex Fiber Media Configuration (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, 0566-1200 only)
SW1 displays the diagnostics on the diagnostic LEDs. Press to display the type and thresholds reached.
• Hold for three seconds to toggle between the Normal and Advanced diagnostics mode.
• Hold for six seconds to clear the counters.

Note: If SW2-4 is set to advanced diagnostics, and if you press and hold SW1 for 3 seconds, the card does not toggle between the diagnostics modes.
The mode is set to advanced.

SW2 configures the diagnostics display and the offline test modes. Refer to 579-1233 for more information on 4120 Duplex Fiber Media Card
Diagnostics. Switch SW2 is a bank of four DIP switches. From left to right (see ), these switches are SW2-1 to SW2-4.

page 90 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Set switch (SW2-1 and SW2-2) Normal/low thresholds

to ON for normal traffic

ON
OFF

Figure 58: DIP switch SW2

Position Description ON OFF

1 Offline test mode Disable Enable
2 Fiber data loopback Disable Enable
3 Select normal/low thresholds to monitor diagnostic LEDs Normal Low
4 Select normal / advanced diagnostics Normal Advanced
Note: If either test mode (SW2-1 and/or SW2-2) is enabled, normal 4120 network traffic is disrupted.

7.3 Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC

The 4100-6078 Network Interface Card (NIC) uses media cards to connect to other NICs. This section describes how the media cards are mounted
onto NICs.

7.3.1 Media Card Mounting

NICs connect to each other via the three types of media cards. The types of media cards in the right and left ports are determined by the type of wiring
that is being used across cards.
Connect P1 on the wired media card, or J1 on the modem or fiber media cards, to P5 (the left port) on the NIC.
To connect a second media card to the same NIC, connect it as described above, but use P6 (the right port) on the NIC. Note that any two types of
media cards can be connected to the same NIC.

page 91 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

MEDIA CARDS
STANDOFFS FIT INTO HOLES
40-PIN
CONNECTION 40-PIN
(MEDIA CARD CONNECTION
P1 OR J1 TO (MEDIA CARD
NIC P5) P1 OR J1 TO
NIC P6)

4100-6014 NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 59: Media Card Mounting

Note: 4100-6301 and 4100-6303 Duplex Fiber Media cards are Left cards and must be inserted in the corresponding Network card Left port (P5).
4100-6302 and 4100-6304 Duplex Fiber Media cards are Right cards and must be inserted in the corresponding Network card Right port (P6). Refer to
the 4120 Duplex Fiber Media Modules installation instructions (579-1238) for informations about mounting the Duplex Fiber Media Card to the NIC.

7.4 Step 3. Mounting Network Cards

7.4.1 Daughter Card Installing

The 4100 NIC daughter card, shown in Figure 60, inserts into motherboards as follows:
• If the 565-274 Master Motherboard is being used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J1.
• If the 566-227 Master Motherboard or 565-275 Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J2.
• If the 566-938 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J6.

page 92 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 60: Installing

the Daughter Card

7.5 Step 4. Wiring Network Cards

The nodes in the network now have to be wired together, so that the NIC in one host panel connects to the NIC in the next panel. This section contains
guidelines and instructions for NIC wiring.

7.5.1 Wiring Guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines whenever field wiring the NICs.
• Network nodes must be wired right to left port, regardless of the media type selected.
• Class X (Style 7) protection is achieved by wiring the nodes in a loop fashion. A single fault (except an Earth fault) will cause the network to
reconfigure for degraded Class X (Style 7) (Style 4) operation. A second fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into two
separate networks.
• Style 4 is achieved by wiring the nodes in a linear fashion. Style 4 networks are not fault-tolerant and a single fault (except an Earth fault) will result
in the network dividing into two separate networks.
• Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. When a network Earth fault occurs, the trouble is only reported on the node whose left
port is connected to the span.
• All 18 AWG wiring used with 4100-6056 Wired Media Cards must be twisted-shielded pair. All 24 AWG (telephone cable) used with 4100-6056
must be twisted pair. When shielded cable is used, the shield must be terminated to chassis Earth on the left port only.
• It is permissible to use mixed media in a network. For example, some spans may be “wired media” while others are optical fiber or telephone
modem.
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between network data rates of 57.6 kbps and
• 9.6 kbps. All cards in the network must be set for the same rate. (When modem media or physical bridging is used, the data rate must be set for
9.6 kbps).
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between 8- and 9-bit network protocols. All cards in the network must be set for the same network protocol.
(When modem media or physical bridging is used, the protocol must be set for 8-bit).
• All network wiring except the shield is supervised and power limited.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the
building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
A 655-158 Transient Suppressor (ordered as part of 748-599) is required for each modem-to-telephone line connection.

page 93 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Transient Suppressor Assembly (655-158)

added to RJ-31x as shown. If connecting to a
terminal block, cut off one end of the cable.
Strip back the cable to connect the two center
8 1
wires, normally red and green, to the red and
green wires in the block.
7 2

6 3

5 4
Grn

Telephone Line

Figure 61: The Transient Suppressor

7.5.2 Wiring Distances

Maximum wiring distances are shown in Table 12.

Table 12: Wiring Distances

Media Type Size Data Rate Max Distance

57.6 kbps 7,000 ft (2,134 m)
24 AWG
9.6 kbps 12,000 ft (3,658 m)
Wired
57.6 kbps 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
18 AWG
9.6 kbps 17,000 ft (5,182 m)
82 021 ft (25 000 m)
9/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps
4100-6301/4100-6302 only
16 404 ft (5 000 m)
4100-6303/4100-6304 only
50/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps
10 000 ft (3 048 m) 4100-6057,
Optical Fiber
4100-0143/4120-0143 only
16 404 ft (5 000 m)
4100-6303/4100-6304 only
62.5/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps
15 000 ft (3 048 m) 4100-6057,
4100-0143/4120-0143 only
Modem (Physical Bridge) 24 AWG (dry) 9.6 kbps 15,000 ft (4,572 m)
57.6 kbps 50 ft (15 m)
RS-232 18 AWG
9.6 kbps 300 ft (91 m)
Note:
• 18 AWG fire-rated twisted, shielded pair must not exceed 58 pF per foot and be less than or equal to 6.385 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).
• 24 AWG twisted, unshielded telephone cable must not exceed 22 pF per foot and be less than or equal to 25.6 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).

7.5.3 Related Documentation

Refer to the 900-408 Field Wiring Specifications for additional NIC wiring information.

7.5.4 Dual Fiber Media Cards Fiber-Optic Wiring (565-261, 566-376, 746-109 only)
Connectors U1 (transmitter) and U2 (receiver) on the 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card are used to connect 4100-6078 NICs across parts of a
network.

Note:
• ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
• Fiber backbone components must meet or exceed standard EIA/TIA 568-B (Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry

page 94 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Association) for maximum power losses; single-mode fiber is preferred; attenuation should be measured at 1310 nm.

Figure 62 shows how two network nodes are connected via fiber-optic cable.

Fiber-Optic Cable

U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2

FIBER MEDIA CARD

4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 62: Fiber Wiring (Dual Fiber Media Card)

7.5.5 Dual Fiber Media Cards Fiber-Optic Connection Types (565-261, 566-376, 746-109 only)
Dual Fiber Optic Cable Connections. The standard fiber optic connection between network nodes uses two fiber optic cables, one for transmit, and
the other for receive. This connection allows for optimum communications distance.
The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used. Distances can be determined using the
information and examples shown in Table 13.
Single Fiber Optic Cable Connections. For applications where a single fiber cable is available, or where use of a single cable is desired, using a
model 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Coupler at each node combines the separate transmit and receive signals into a single path (refer to the requirements
list).
This connection allows use of a single fiber cable, but it does reduce communications distance as indicated in the information and examples shown in
Table 14.

7.5.6 4190-9010 Coupler Requirements

The 4190-9010 Coupler (271-012) is used with the 565-261 Fiber Optic Media Board (revision “C” or higher), the 566-376 or the 746-109. It can not
be used with the Duplex Fiber Media Cards (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, 0566-1200). Two 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Couplers are required per
connection, one at each node.
The 4190-9010 is equipped with type ST connectors. To make type ST to type ST connections, an ST to ST coupler, by others, is required. ST to ST
Couplers are available from:
• Black Box, part number FO200
• Fiber Instrument Sales, part number F1-8101
• Newark Electronics, part number 95F2097 (or the equivalent)

Table 13: Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples

Fiber Type 1* MIFL 2 Power Margin Distance 3 Budget 3

50/125 4 dB/km 4 dB 10,000 ft (3.05 km) 17 dB

page 95 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 13: Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples

Fiber Type 1* MIFL 2 Power Margin Distance 3 Budget 3

numerical
3 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft (4.57 km)
aperture = 0.2
62.5/125 4 dB/km 4 dB 13,000 ft (3.96 km)
numerical 20.4 dB
3.75 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft (4.57 km)
aperture = 0.275
*See notes at bottom of page.

Table 14: Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples*

4190-9010 ST to ST Coupler
Fiber Type 1 MIFL 2 Power Margin Distance 3 Budget 3
Coupler Loss Loss
50/125 numerical
3 dB/km 7,650 ft(2.33 km) 3 dB
numerical = 0.2
2 dB 21.4 dB 9.4 dB
62.5/125 numerical
3.2 dB/km 8,200 ft (2.5 km) 2 dB
aperture = 0.275
*Examples made using 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Couplers
Notes for Table 13 and Table 14:
1. Cable specifications are for 50 or 62.5 micron core with 125 micron cladding, multi-mode graded index fiber. Wavelength = 850 nm.
2. MIFL = Maximum Individual Fiber Loss. Numbers shown are for example reference only, refer to specific cable for exact specification.
3. Maximum cable length is determined by distance listed or by reaching budget value, whichever is shorter. Maximum distances listed for dual
fiber cable are shorter than would be calculated. Budget using 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Coupler is the same with either size cable because
the coupler input cables are 62.5/125 fiber allowing launch power to be the same.
Figure 63 shows coupler wiring.

Figure 63: Coupler Wiring

7.5.7 Duplex Fiber Optic wiring (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, or 0566-1200 only)
Use the transceiver U1 on the duplex fiber-optic media card to connect 4100ES NICs across parts of a 4120 network. Figure 21 shows how two
network nodes are connected via fiber-optic cable.
• Do not mix single-mode and multi-mode cards on the same link, that is, do not connect a single mode right card to a multi-mode left card.
• The 4100 series duplex fiber cards are not compatible with dual fiber-optic media cards. Existing media cards at both ends of the link must be
replaced.
• The 4100 series Duplex Fiber Cards are not compatible with all modular network cards. Refer to Appendix A: Modular network card compatibility
for additional information.
• When you use fiber-optic cable, use SC connectors with long strain relief boots.
When servicing dual fiber-optic media cards, on retrofit jobs where multi-mode fibers with ST connectors are already installed, order service kits
650-2013 for 62.5/125um installations, or 650-2014 for 50/125um installations.

page 96 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 15: Fiber media card service kits

650-2013 Fiber Media Card Service Kit MM 650-2014 Fiber Media Card Service Kit MM
62.5um 50um
Qty Part # Description Qty Part # Description
4120 MM-R Duplex 4120 MM-R Duplex
1 743-2032 1 743-2032
Fiber Media Assy Fiber Media Assy
4120 MM-L Duplex 4120 MM-L Duplex
1 743-2031 1 743-2031
Fiber Media Assy Fiber Media Assy
Multi-Mode 62.5/125 Multi-Mode 50/125 ST-
2 171-100 2 171-099
STSC Patch Cord.46m SC Patch Cord.46m
2 166-747 ST- ST Coupler 2 166-747 ST- ST Coupler
2 156-087 Wire Clamp 2 156-087 Wire Clamp
2 650-2077 Insulating Sleeve 2 650-2077 Insulating Sleeve

Fiber Media Card

Figure 64: Duplex fiber wiring

Note: There are different models for right and left ports. Install the correct model in its respective port on the network card.

7.5.8 Duplex Fiber-Optic Cable Distance Specifications (566-1197, 566-1198, 566-1199, 566-1200)
The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used, the overall link topology and the available
power budget.

Table 16: Duplex fiber-optic cable communications distance examples

Coupler/Slice
Fiber type MIFL Power margin Distance Budget
Losses
50/125 or 62.5/125
1.5 dB/km @1300 0.75 dB max for
Multi-mode numerical aperture 3 dB 5 km 18 dB
nm each mated pair
= 0.275
0.30 dB max for for
9/125 numerical each fusion splice
Single-mode 1 dB/km @1310 nm 3 dB 25 km 22 dB
aperture = 0.2

page 97 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Note:
1. Fiber type: Cable specifications are for:
- 9 micron core with 125 micron cladding, single-mode graded index fiber or
- 50 or 62.5 micron core with 125 micron cladding, multi-mode graded index fiber.
2. MIFL: Maximum Individual Fiber Loss. Numbers shown are industry standard references. Refer to the specific cable for exact specifications.
3. Distance: The maximum distance between nodes is determined by the total loss from the transmitter to the associated receiver (fiber loss,
connector loss, splice loss and safety margin), or the maximum distance listed, whichever is smaller.
4. Wavelength: Left media = Tx 1550/Rx 1310 nm. Right media = Tx 1310/Rx 1550.
5. Link Budget: Attenuation should be measured at the following wavelengths.
- Multi-mode @ 1300nm
- Single-mode @ 1310nm

7.5.9 Wiring with the Wired Media Card

Refer to the guidelines and figures in this topic to use wired media cards.

Important: TB1 on the wired media card must not be used when it is connected to the 4100-6078 NIC.

• When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, 566-407, 566–409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot
be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
• The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the
building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
Table 17, lists the 4100ES master motherboard connections for the wired media card.

Table 17: CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections

566-227 CPU Master Motherboard RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Motherboard Port for Media Wired Media Card Connection Motherboard Port for Media Card Wired Media Card Connection
Card Connected to P5 (Left Port) Connected to P5 (Left Port)
TB1-4 0V TB2-4 0V
TB1-5 Earth ground TB2-5 Earth ground
TB1 TB1-6 INV (-) TB2 TB2-6 INV (-)
TB1-7 None TB2-7 None
TB1-8 NONINV (+) TB2-8 NONINV (+)
Motherboard Port for Media Wired Media Card Connection Motherboard Port for Media Card Wired Media Card Connection
Card Connected to P6 (Right Port) Connected to P6 (Right Port)
TB3-1 NONINV (+) TB3-1 NONINV (+)
TB3-2 Reserved TB3-2 Reserved
TB3 TB3-3 INV (-) TB3 TB3-3 INV (-)
TB3-4 Earth ground TB3-4 Earth ground
TB3-5 0V TB3-5 0V
Figure 65, shows how two CPU motherboards with wired media network cards connect to each other in the 4100ES.

page 98 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

R+ R-
18 AWG
1 51 5
TB3

8 TB1 1

L+ L-

Figure 65: Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards

7.5.10 Modem Guidelines

Review the following guidelines before wiring a network with modem media boards.
• Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.
• Phone Line Classification consists of the following:
- Private leased line for analog data communications
- No dial tone
- Full duplex operation
- No conditioning required
- No signaling required
- Two-wire line interface
- RJ-11 modular jack
• If a four-wire circuit is required, the line must include a data station termination (DST) device to provide the two-wire interface required by the
4120 network modem. The DST device should be located as close to the FACP as possible to minimize dry line signal losses.
• The modem is capable of full duplex V.32bis analog data communications. The transmit signal level is 10 dbm.
• Telecommunications device: Xecom Model XE1414 or XE1414C V.32bis Two-Wire Analog Modem
• Modem FCC Registration Number: DWEUSA-75322-FA-E (565-279); DWEUSA-35610-M5-E (566-338)

page 99 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.5.11 Modem Wiring

Important:
Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.

The Modem Media Card uses RJ-11 connectors to connect 4100-6078 NIC Assemblies across parts of a network.
Use the RJ-11 connector (P2) to connect nodes that use the modem media card. Do not use connector P1 (P1 is reserved for when the daughter card
is used as a physical bridge). Leased lines must be analog, full-duplex, private line (no dial tone), with a two-wire RJ-11 interface. Style 4 requires one
circuit; Class X (Style 7) requires two circuits.

Standard TELCO Cable

P3 P3 P3 P3

MODEM MEDIA
CARD

4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 66: Modem Wiring

7.5.12 Wiring Illustrations

The following figures show how to wire the NIC. The illustrations use the 565-274 and 565-275 motherboards only. If you are using the 4100ES
motherboard, refer to Figure 67 along with the figures below.

page 100 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.5.13 Wired Media Class X (Style 7) Wiring

SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3

OR OR
566-826 566-825

SEE NOTE 5

Figure 67: Wired Media, Class X (Style 7) Wiring

Note:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-408 for 4100ES.
2. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be
used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
3. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8. 5. Each “wired” media cable requires two
ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.
5. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions
574-041 for proper bead mounting.

page 101 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.5.14 Fiber Optic Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only)

SEE NOTE 5
4020
SEE NOTE 5

OV2 FIBER + -
I
XMT 7
L- OPTION R R
V
L+ RCV
NETWORK ASSY* 0
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ASSY LEFT PORT XMT RCV XMT RCV
OV1 TB1
R- 565-411 FIBER FIBER
R+ 0R OPTION OPTION
TB2 566-826 TB1 ASSY* ASSY*
MOTHERBOARD
FIBER PORT ASSY
XMT
OPTION LEFT RIGHT 565-275
ASSY* RCV
NETWORK INTERFACE
RIGHT PORT (DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR TB2
566-793 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4100 L L O
+ - V
2

SEE NOTE 5 + - I
R R V
0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
XMT RCV XMT RCV TB1 4002
FIBER FIBER
OPTION OPTION OV2
ASSY* ASSY* FIBER XMT
L- OPTION
MOTHERBOARD L+
ASSY NETWORK ASSY* RCV
PORT EARTH
LEFT RIGHT 565-274 EARTH INTERFACE
ASSY LEFT PORT
OV1
NETWORK INTERFACE 565-432
R-
(DAUGHTER CARD) R+ 0R
ASSY 565-409 OR 566-825
566-793 TB2 TB1

4100 TB2 FIBER XMT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ASSY* RCV
* FIBER OPTION ASSY L L O
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109 RIGHT PORT
+ - V
CAN BE USED 2
FD4-848-2

Figure 68: Fiber Optic, Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only)

Note:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-408 for 4100ES.
For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial. 2.
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index:
10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference
document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.

page 102 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.5.15 Wired Media and Fiber Optic Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only)

SEE NOTE 6
SEE NOTES 7 and 8 FD4-848-3
* FIBER OPTION ASSY
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109
4020
CAN BE USED

OV2
“WIRED” + -
L- LEFT I
L+ MEDIA R R
PORT V
EARTH NETWORK OPTION
0
EARTH INTERFACE ASSY
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OV1 ASSY 565-413 SEE NOTE 5 XMT RCV “WIRED” TB1
R- 565-411
R+ 0R FIBER MEDIA
566-826 OPTION OPTION
TB2 TB1 ASSY* ASSY
565-413 MOTHERBOARD
FIBER XMT 4100 ASSY
OPTION PORT
LEFT RIGHT 565-275
ASSY* RCV
NETWORK INTERFACE
RIGHT PORT
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR TB2
566-793 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4002 L L O
+ - V
2
OV2 FIBER
L- XMT
OPTION
L+ RCV
NETWORK ASSY*
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE
LEFT PORT + - I
OV1 ASSY
R R V
R- 565-432
R+ 0R 0
566-825 “WIRED” 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB2 TB1
MEDIA “WIRED” XMT RCV TB1
OPTION MEDIA FIBER
ASSY OPTION OPTION
RIGHT
565-413 ASSY ASSY*
PORT
565-413 MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
PORT
LEFT RIGHT 565-274

NETWORK INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793
TB2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L O
+ - V
2

SEE
NOTES 7
and 8

Figure 69: Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Class X (Style 7) Wiring (565-261, 0566-376, or 746-109 only)

Note:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-408 for 4100ES.
For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index:
10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference
document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.
6. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be
used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
7. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
8. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions
574-041 for proper bead mounting.
9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves
the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

page 103 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.5.16 Duplex fiber optic Class X (Style 7) wiring (0566-1197, 0566-1198, 0566-1199, 0566-1200 only)

4020

OV2 FIBER OPTION

ASSY XCVR + - 1
L-
566-1198, R R V
L+
NETWORK OR 566-1200 O
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OV1 ASSY LEFT PORT XCVR XCVR TB1
R- 565-518 FIBER OPTION FIBER OPTION
ASSY ASSY 566-1197,
OR 566-826
R+ 566-1198, 566-1199
OR 566-1200
TB1
TB2 MOTHERBOARD
FIBER OPTION ASSY
PORT
ASSY 566-1197, XCVR 565-275
566-1199 LEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACE
RIGHT PORT (DAUGHTER CARD)
TB2
ASSY 566-793
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L O
4100
+ - V
2

+ - 1
R R V
O
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
XCVR XCVR TB1
FIBER OPTION
4002
FIBER OPTION
ASSY ASSY 566-1197,
566-1198, 566-1199
OR 566-1200 OV2
FIBER OPTION
L-
MOTHERBOARD L+
ASSY
ASSY NETWORK 566-1198,
PORT EARTH OR 566-1200 XCVR
LEFT RIGHT 565-274 INTERFACE
EARTH
OV1 ASSY
NETWORK INTERFACE 565-519 LEFT PORT
R-
(DAUGHTER CARD) OR 566-825
R+
ASSY 566-793
TB2 TB1
FIBER OPTION
TB2 ASSY 566-1197,XCVR
4100 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 566-1199
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L O
+ - V RIGHT PORT
2

Figure 70: Duplex fiber-optic Class X (Style 7) wiring (566-1197, 566-1198, 566-1199, or 566-1200 only)

Note:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document. For specific information about fiber-optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
2. The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used and the available power budget. The
maximum distance between nodes is determined by the total loss from the transmitter to the associated receiver, for example, fiber loss,
connector loss, splice loss, and safety margin, or the maximum distance listed, whichever is smaller. See Table 1 for allowed losses.
3. Use SC connectors with long strain relief boots for the fiber-optic cable.
4. Use fiber media service kits 650-2013 and 650-2014 on retrofit jobs where fibers with ST connectors are already installed.
5. Use cable clamps supplied with 748-531, 650-2013 and 650-2014 to secure the fiber cable.

page 104 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTES 5 AND 6 OV2

L- “WIRED” MEDIA LEFT
+ - 1
L+ OPTION PORT R R V
ASSY 565-413
ш
EARTH O
EARTH NETWORK
OV1 INTERFACE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R- ASSY 565-518 XCVR “WIRED
WIRED”” MEDIA
FIBER OPTION TB1
R+ OR 566-826 ASSY,
OPTION
ASSY 565-413
TB2 TB1 566-1198, 566-1197,
OR 566-1200 566-1198,
FIBER OPTION 566-1199 OR
ASSY 566-1197, XCVR 566-1200
566-1199 4100
PORT MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
LEFT NETWORK RIGHT
RIGHT PORT 565-275
INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 566-793

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L ш O
4002 V
+ - 2

OV2
L- FIBER OPTION
XCVR
L+ ASSY ,
EARTH 566-1198, OR
EARTH NETWORK 566-1200 + - 1
INTERFACE R R ш V
OV1 LEFT PORT O
R- ASSY
R+ 565-519
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB2 OR 566-825 “WIRED” MEDIA
OPTION
“WIRED” MEDIA XCVR TB1
ASSY 565-413 TB1 OPTION FIBER OPTION
ASSY ASSY 566-1197,
RIGHT 566-1199 MOTHERBOARD
PORT ASSY
565-274
PORT
LEFT NETWORK RIGHT
INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 566-793

TB2
9 101112131415 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
O
L L ш
V
+ - 2

SEE NOTES 5 AND 6

Figure 71: Wired and duplex fiber media, Class X (Style 7) wiring (566-1197, 566-1198, 566-1199, or 566-1200 only)

Note:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document. For specific information about fiber-optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
2. The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used and the available power budget. The
maximum distance between nodes is determined by the total loss from the transmitter to the associated receiver, for example, fiber loss,
connector loss, splice loss, and safety margin, or the maximum distance listed, whichever is smaller. See Table 1 for allowed losses.
3. Use cable clamps supplied with 748-531, 650-2013 and 650-2014 to secure the fiber cable.
4. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with the 566-793, Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to
the motherboard is required as shown.
5. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
6. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions
574-041 for proper bead mounting.
7. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves
the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
8. Use fiber media service kits 650-2013 and 650-2014 on retrofit jobs where fibers with ST connectors are already installed.

7.5.17 Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)

Important:
Figure 72 applies only to non-4100ES/4100U systems.

page 105 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4020

0V 2
MODEM 1+ -
L-
MEDIA VR R
L+
NETWORK ASSY 0
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE 87654321
ASSY LEFT PORT
0V 1 "WIRED" MODEM TB1
R- 565-518
MEDIA MEDIA
R+ OR ASSY ASSY
TB2 566-826 TB1 565-413
MOTHER
MODEM PORT BOARD
LEFT RIGHT ASSY
MEDIA
ASSY NETWORK INTERFACE 565-275
ASSY 565-516 OR 566-793
RIGHT PORT MODEM
MEDIA TB2
ASSY
12345678
L L 0
4100 + - V
2
PHONE JACK
OR
TELEPHONE
TERMINATION
BLOCK

4020
+ 1-
0V 2 R VR
MODEM 0
L-
MEDIA 87654321
L+
NETWORK ASSY
EARTH TB1
INTERFACE "WIRED" "WIRED"
EARTH
ASSY LEFT PORT MEDIA MEDIA
0V 1
565-518 ASSY ASSY
R-
OR 565-413 565-413
R+ MOTHER
TB2 566-826 BOARD
TB1 PORT
ASSY
LEFT RIGHT
"WIRED" 565-274
MEDIA ASSY NETWORK INTERFACE
565-413 ASSY 565-516
OR 566-793
RIGHT PORT
4100 TB2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L 0
+ - V
2

Figure 72: Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)

Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG twisted pair.
2. Connections between nodes can be made using unpowered (“dry”) copper wires or through powered (“wet”) leased lines.
3. Maximum cable distance between nodes when using short haul is 24 AWG twisted pair is 15,000 feet (4,572 m).
4. Long haul telephone circuits must be private leased lines for analog data, point-to-point, full duplex, two-wire line interface with RJ-11
termination (where no line conditioning or signaling are required).
5. Modem media board power (565-279/566-338): 180 mA. Maximum at 5 +/- 0.25 VDC.
6. Modem media boards operate only at 9600 bps, with an 8-bit protocol.
7. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-408 for 4100ES.
Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem.
8. When using a service modem, connect to the 565-516 or 566-793 board using Cable 733-808 in shipping group 740-850. Use Cable 171-095
to connect the modem to a phone jack and/or a telephone termination block. Cut off one end of Cable 171-095 if connecting to a telephone
termination block. Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires to the red and green wires in the block. Refer to Test Specification
576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem. Place jumpers across 1-2 of P4 and 2-3 of P5.

page 106 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves
the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
10. Modem media assemblies have part number 565-279 or 566-338.
11. A network can support can support up to 98 physical bridge nodes. Only four modems are permitted per network.

7.6 Network Audio Wiring

7.6.1 Head-End Audio Network Configuration

A “Head End” audio network usually contains one node with an audio controller module
(4100-1210 Analog Controller Board or 4100-1211 or 4100-1311 Digital Controller Board), and may contain local analog or digital amplifiers. Some
configurations may have an audio controller module located in a non-head end node; for example, an application with backup local audio in a non-
head end node or an application with distributed microphones.
Typically, the other nodes only contain amplifiers, the audio riser interface (4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser), the
4100-0623 and the 4100-1341 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
The 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module supports audio interconnections when connected to 4100-0621 Analog Audio Risers or
4100-0622 Digital Audio Risers. It is a version of the Basic TIC that doesn’t have an RUI input. It communicates via internal slave communications and is
used to control audio riser interface modules in network nodes that are stand-alone fire alarm control panels.

7.6.2 Locations on the Network Audio Riser Controller Module

Figure 73 shows the DIP switch, LED, and connector locations on the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

page 107 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

RUI
TMPR SW PRI SEC
24C INPUT SHLD

SW1. Baud
rate/device address TB2 TB3

DIP switch (see LED4 LED5

Appendix A)
SW1

LED1. Illuminates
to indicate
communication loss
with the CPU 4100
COMM
LED1
LOSS
RUI LED2
G.F.
SEARCH

P3. Audio riser

connector
P1

P3

AUDIO RISER CARD

Figure 73: Network Audio Riser Controller Module

7.6.3 Card Specifications

Table 18 lists the specifications for the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Table 18: Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Input voltage 18-33 VDC
Input Current 25 mA for Network Audio Riser Controller connected to a network node

Environmental Specifications
o o o o
Operating Temperature 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C)
o o
Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 F (32 C)

page 108 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.6.4 Analog Interconnections

Figure 74 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller
Module.

Note: Old legacy 0566-218 Analog Audio Controller was replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement board is the 0566-1011 Analog
Audio Controller. It is functionally equivalent to the legacy board.

Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

1 10
SAA SAA

RISER 1 RISER 2
TB1 4100-0623 4100-0623 4100-0623
4100-1210 AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER
ANALOG CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
AUDIO MODULE MODULE MODULE
CONTROLLER
(566-218, -1011)
Node 1
Host Panel HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS
733-997 733-997 733-997
DASHED
LINES ARE P3 P3 P3
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION P2 P2 P2

4100-0621 4100-0621 4100-0621

ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-242) (566-242) (566-242)

RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1

SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI
TB1 S S TB1 S S TB1 S S
1 10 1 10 1 10

Figure 74: Analog Audio Interconnections

Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. The maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser is 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. The maximum wire distance is10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

page 109 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

7.6.5 Digital Interconnections for the 4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller

Figure 75 is an illustration of Class X (Style 7) and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital audio controller to risers connected to the Network
Audio Riser Controller Module.

Note: Old legacy 0566-409 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-407 DARIC, and 0566-833 MCC DARIC boards were replaced due to component obsoles-
cence. The replacement boards are the 0566-1028 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-1000 DARIC, and 0566-1001 MCC DARIC. They are functionally equiv-
alent to the legacy boards.

NODE N
DAR TO (STYLE 4
PRIMARY ONLY)
INPUT
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

TB2
4100-0623 4100-0623 4100-0623
4100-1311 AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER
DIGITAL CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
AUDIO MODULE MODULE MODULE
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)

HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS

Host Panel 733-997 733-997 733-997
P3 P3 P3

Ferrite Bead P2 P2 P2
(required on primary
and secondary DAR)
4100-0622 4100-0622 4100-0622
DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-407, -1000) (566-407, -1000) (566-407, -1000)

TB3 TB3 TB3

Loop wires once
through the supplied
ferrite beads NODE R
as shown (STYLE 4
ONLY)
DASHED DAR TO
LINES ARE NODE P DAR TO NODE Q PRIMARY
FOR CLASS X (STYLE 7) (STYLE 4 PRIMARY (STYLE 4 INPUT
OPERATION ONLY) INPUT ONLY)

Figure 75: Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG , twisted-pair.

2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters).
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:

page 110 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of four
overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 uF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a non-
synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.

7.6.6 Distributed Microphone Interconnections

A Distributed Microphone is used between audio nodes in a network system where each node has its own local audio (its own Digital Audio Controller)
but needs to be able to play the microphone channel from a separate node’s Digital Audio Controller.
For a distributed microphone application, the 4100-0622 Digital Riser Interface (566-407, -1000) has a single digital to analog converter that can be set
to convert any single channel of the Digital Audio Riser (DAR) stream to analog. This analog output is connected to a second Digital Audio Controller’s
remote microphone input or to the microphone input of a 4100-1240 Input Option Card (566-037). DIP switches configure the channel selection and
density.
Figure 76 is an illustration of the distributed microphone application wiring. Refer to the Switches and Indicators section for switch settings to
configure the distributed microphone channel output.
Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum)
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum)
6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

page 111 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

(566-409, -1028)

(566-407, -1000)

(566-409, -1028)

Figure 76: Distributed Microphone Interconnections

7.6.7 Reference for MCC DARIC Installation

For information of the installation of Multiple Digital Command Centre (MCC) Digital Audio Riser Input Option Cards (DARICs) refer to the latest revision
of document 574-844.

7.7 Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

A Digital Audio Riser Termination Plug (734-183) is provided with every Digital Audio Controller or Digital Audio Riser Module. You must use this
termination plug to properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI.

7.7.1 Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

To properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI, you must install the termination plug into P7 of the Node’s last bay that has Digital Audio.
The Digital Audio Controller should be the first item and the Digital Audio Termination Plug the last item in the Digital Audio PDI Bay-to-Bay wiring. See
Figure 77.

page 112 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Place the Digital Audio PDI

Termination Plug into P7 of the
Node’s last bay with Digital
Audio.

Figure 77: Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

page 113 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

8 ES Net Networking
A standalone 4100ES system becomes an ES Net network node when an ES Net Network Interface Card (NIC) is installed and connected to another
network node.
The ES Net Network Interface Card (NIC) is an option card that is used to add a 4100ES FACP or a TSW node to an ES Net network. You can mount
the ES Net NIC in a bay in the FACP, and configure the card as an ES Net NIC or an ES Net TSW NIC. The NIC communicates between each panel using
Ethernet, DSL, or fiber connections in a Class X (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) wiring configuration.
The NICs are designed to be connected in a point-to-point arrangement, so that one wire fault does not cause the entire system to fail. The point-to-
point connection provides a secure and fault-tolerant wiring arrangement.
Network connection is available directly on the ES Net NIC using Ethernet cables and up to 2 media cards can be used for additional connection
requirements (Fiber, Ethernet or DSL). A mix of different media card type is also supported.
4100ES Panel

Link could be Ethernet,

DSL or Fiber optic.
Fire Control

Ring Topology
Network

4100ES Panel

TrueSite Workstation

Figure 78: ES Net network ring

The following media cards are compatible with the ES Net NIC:
• 4100-6306 ES Net Dual Channel Ethernet media card
• 4100-6307 ES Net Dual Channel DSL media card
• 4100 6308 ES Net Dual Channel Single-mode Fiber-Optic media card
• 4100-6309 ES Net Dual Channel Multi-mode Fiber-optic media card
For more information about installing the 4100-6310 flat type ES Net NIC, see Flat Type ES Net NIC Installation Instructions (579-1257).
For more information about installing the 4100-6104 slot type ES Net NIC, see Slot Type ES Net NIC Installation Instructions (579-1256).
For more information about installing the optional media cards, see ES Net Dual Channel Fiber, Ethernet, and DSL Media Card Installation Instructions
(579-1258).

page 114 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

9 The System Power Supply (SPS)

This chapter describes how the system power supply (SPS) is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make
sure the SPS is installed correctly.

9.1 SPS Specifications

9.1.1 Input/Output/Battery Specifications

Table 19 summarizes the specifications for the SPS.

Table 19: Input and Output Specifications

AC Input Specifications
4 A Maximum
SPS in Standard U.S./Canada FACP or 4100-5111/5112 SPS
120 VAC @ 60 Hz, nominal
2 A Maximum
SPS in Standard International FACP or 4100-5113 SPS
220/230/240 VAC @ 50 or 60 Hz
DC Output Specifications
Minimum: 19.9 VDC (Special Applications)
All SPSs Maximum: 31.1 VDC
Ripple: 2 VDC p-p @ full load (9 A)
SPS IDNet Output (see note) 30 V or 35 V @ 1/2A; 36.75V maximum; 3,333 bits per second
Battery Charger Specifications
Input Voltage Range 21-33 VDC
27.4 VDC ±500 mV @ 20oC, temperature compensated at -24mV to -36mV/×C
Output Float Voltage o o o o
(32 F to 120 F or 0 C to 49 C)
High Voltage Output 29.1 V @ 3.3 A
1.4 A (For 6.2 - 18 Ah battery)
Output Current Limit
3.3 A (Default; for 18-50 Ah battery- Canadian; for 18-110 Ah battery - U.S.)
Note:
• The battery circuit is supervised.
• When it is necessary to activate large numbers of output devices on IDNet peripherals (such as piezo sounders), the output voltage is increased to
35V to provide sufficient voltage at the end of line to activate the piezo. The higher voltage state is an alarm condition for the purpose of standby
battery calculation. The 30V output is the normal condition and is used to prolong battery standby. The system CPU will activate the boost feature
when 10 LED, Piezo or other outputs are activated.
• AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated AC branch circuit. The AC input is supervised.
• 220/230/240 VAC SPS only: The service branch circuit breaker should be sized to handle at least 150 percent of the total required by all of the
power supplies in the system. If more than a 13 A branch circuit is required then multiple dedicated branch circuits should be used instead.
• The 4100ES is a configurable system. Each system must be evaluated for battery standby requirements based upon the configuration. 4100ES
systems can be configured with multiple sets of batteries if necessary. A basic 4100ES system can achieve 24 hours standby with 12.7 Ah
batteries. For UL Listed systems, up to 110 Ah batteries may be used. For ULC Listed systems, up to 50 Ah batteries may be used. Refer to the
Sales Engineering battery calculation tool for assistance.

9.1.2 SPS Current Consumption

Table 20 summarizes battery standby capabilities for the SPS. Voltage assumed is 24 VDC, which is the rated battery voltage for lead-acid type
batteries.

Table 20: SPS Current Specifications

Standby Conditions Current

• No alarms (NACs normal)
175 mA
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each additional set of 50 IDNet devices in standby, with IDNet at 30 V 40 mA
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in standby 375 mA
Alarm Conditions Current

page 115 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 20: SPS Current Specifications

• 3 NACs ON
185 mA
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 80 mA
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, LEDs OFF 50 mA
Total current for a fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 475 mA
Note:
• Additional standby conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA
• Additional alarm conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA, NAC
alarm load = 0 mA, IDNet = 35 V

The Notification Appliance Circuits on the SPS are rated for Special Application and for Regulated 24 VDC operation per UL864, 9th Edition.
When used with the Notification Appliances listed in Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices or Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock
Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications, each NAC is rated for 3A, and total SPS capacity is rated at 9A.
This rating is the UL864 Special Application rating. Appliances listed in Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices or Appendix I: Cooper
Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications are synchronized per UL864, between all NACs on the
SPS, and any NACs on a SPS, RPS, or XPS within the same 4100ES system.
For use with Notification Appliances not listed in Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devicesor Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances
Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications, each circuit is rated for 2A maximum, with a total Notification Appliance load of
4A per SPS. This rating is the UL 864 Regulated 24 VDC rating. Synchronization of strobes and other appliances requires use of the associated, Listed,
compatible Synchronization Module. Consult supplier of Notification Appliances for synchronization limits and details.
Simplex Appliances (Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices) May not be mixed with Wheelock Appliances (Appendix I: Cooper
Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications) on a single power supply. A 4100ES system with mix
of appliances fromAppendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devicesand Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES
Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications will not meet the UL 864 9th Edition requirement for Visual synchronization (10 milliseconds) between
power supplies. Appliances listed in Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices will be consistently out of visual sync with appliances
in Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications by about 30 milliseconds.
Appliances listed Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices will be notably out of audible sync with appliances in Appendix I: Cooper
Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications by a consistent (Wheelock leading by 1/2 second). In
order to meet the requirements for visual and audible sync system wide, all appliances in the system must be exclusively from either Appendix H:
EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices or Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special
Applications.
Non-pulsing, linear-type Notification Appliances, such as horns or bells may be used up to the full rating (3A / NAC, 9A total for the SPS).

9.2 SPS Configuration

This section contains information about SPS jumpers and DIP switches. Refer to 4120 Networking of this document for information on setting the
jumpers.

9.2.1 Jumper Settings

P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.
Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor
for earth faults. If there is a second SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power
modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to
monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.
P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards
P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.
P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in position 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation

9.2.2 Setting the Device Address

Refer to Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch to set the device address for the SPS with DIP switch SW1.

page 116 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

9.3 SPS LED Indications

9.3.1 LEDs
The SPS has the following LEDs:
LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 1 is ON or in Trouble.
LED2 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 2 is ON or in Trouble.
LED3 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 3 is ON or in Trouble.
LED4 (yellow). Illuminates to indicate a communications loss with the system CPU; normally off. If this LED is blinking, try re-loading the software to
FLASH.
LED5 (yellow). Indicates IDNet status.
• Slow blink: Class A open circuit trouble.
• Fast blink: Short circuit trouble.
• On steady: No devices detected/ channel failure.
• Normally off.
LED6 (yellow). Indicates power supply status.
• Single blink: Positive earth fault.
• Double blink: Negative earth fault.
• Triple blink: Battery trouble.
• Quadruple blink: Charger trouble.
• On steady: Overcurrent fault.
• Normally off.
LED7 (green). Illuminates when the power supply is powered from the AC line. Off when the power supply is de-energized, or when it is using battery
backup power.

9.4 Troubleshooting
This section contains explanations of trouble messages that may appear on the 4100ES display when using the SPS. Heading text in the left margin
shows the error message, while the paragraph next to it describes the likely cause of the message.

9.4.1 IDNet Power Monitor Trouble

There is no output voltage from the power supply.

9.4.2 Extra Device

Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNet channel) are one the system. Only one message
appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.

9.4.3 Class A Trouble

There is an open on the IDNet channel. A hardware reset is required to reset the trouble.

9.4.4 Earth Fault Search

Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the search
process has progressed (10%, 25%… 75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that
the earth fault could not be found. SPS circuits (IDNet, NAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during
the search.

9.4.5 Short Circuit

Appears when a short is detected on the IDNet channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.

9.4.6 Channel Fail

Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This
message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the IDNet channel.

page 117 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

9.4.7 No Answer/Bad Answer

Occurs when the 4100ES is put into a diagnostic mode and finds a device not responding, or responding unreliably. Refer to the ES Panel
Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for information on how to perform this diagnostic.

9.4.8 Output Abnormal

Occurs when 24 VDC is not present on TrueAlarm devices or when TrueAlarm sensor bases with relay driver outputs are not properly supervised or
when isolator devices are in isolation mode.

page 118 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

10 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

This chapter shows how 4100ES devices are wired to notification appliances. Most of the connections shown herein are reverse-polarity NACs, IDNet
circuits, and power circuits.

10.1 General Field Wiring Guidelines

10.1.1 General Guidelines

Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring:
• All wires must be 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.
• Conductors must test free of all grounds.
• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• If shielded wire is used,
- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.
- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earth ground.
• Underground wiring must be free of all water.
• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient Suppressor should be used on monitor
points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Wires that run in plenum must be in conduit.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy
resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the
original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth
detection per NFPA780.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

page 119 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

10.1.2 Power-Limited Guidelines

Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring for power-limited systems:
• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in the shaded areas shown in Table 21.
• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded areas shown in Table 21, with the exception of City wiring.
• Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire
ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points, as shown in Figure 79.

CONDUIT ENTRANCE
FOR NON-POWER
CONDUIT ENTRANCE LIMITED WIRING
FOR POWER-LIMITED
WIRING

NON-POWER LIMITED
WIRING

POWER-LIMITED
WIRING

TIE POINT
(LOCATION MAY VARY)

Figure 79: Power-Limited Wiring

• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must be provided by a power-limited power
supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. An EOL relay must be used to supervise the auxiliary power circuit.
• Auxiliary power only: Supervision must be provided if the auxiliary power circuit is to be wired as a power-limited circuit. In order to connect a
circuit using power-limited wiring, the devices being powered must all be addressable, or a UL Listed EOL relay must be used to supervise the
circuit. Refer to Figure 80 for wiring directions for the EOL relay.

page 120 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

TO AUX POWER

RED BLACK

2098-9739
END OF
LINE RELAY

YELLOW

LAST IDC
IDC DEVICE RESISTOR

Figure 80: The EOL Relay

Note: The 2098-9739 Relay is used as an example. Other UL Listed 24VDC EOL relays can be used, depending on the application.

10.2 Power Supply Wiring Distances

Before wiring from any type of power supply to notification appliances, check Table 21 and Table 22 for wiring distances.

10.2.1 Class A NAC Wiring Table

Table 21 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a Class A configuration, depending on wire gauge and
current. Use Table 21 to calculate wire distances for your application if you are using Class A wiring.

Table 21: Class A Wiring Distances

Alarm Current@ 24 Max Distance with Max Distancewith 16 Max Distancewith 14 Max Distancewith 12
DC Resistance
VDC 18 AWG AWG AWG AWG
0.25 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.50 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms
0.75 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms
1.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms
1.25 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
1.50 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm
1.75 A 60 ft. (18 m) 95 ft. (29 m) 152 ft. (46 m) 242 ft. (74 m) 0.86 Ohm
2.00 A 53 ft. (16 m) 83 ft. (25 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 211 ft. (64 m) 0.75 Ohm
2.25 A 47 ft. (14 m) 74 ft. (23 m) 118 ft. (36 m) 188 ft. (57 m) 0.67 Ohm
2.50 A 42 ft. (13 m) 67 ft. (20 m) 106 ft. (32 m) 169 ft. (51 m) 0.60 Ohm
2.75 A 38 ft. (12 m) 61 ft. (19 m) 97 ft. (30 m) 154 ft. (47 m) 0.55 Ohm
3.00 A 35 ft. (11 m) 56 ft. (17 m) 89 ft. (27 m) 141 ft. (43 m) 0.50 Ohm
• Max Distance = distance from SPS/RPS to last appliance.
• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in locations that could be exposed to higher
temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire-rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of
potential exposure.

page 121 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

10.2.2 Class B NAC Wiring Table

Table 22 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a Class B configuration, depending on wire gauge and
current. Use Table 22 to calculate wire distances for your application if you are using Class B wiring.

Table 22: Class B Wiring Distances

Alarm Current @ 24 Max Distance with Max Distance with 16 Max Distancewith 14 Max Distance with 12
DC Resistance
VDC 18 AWG AWG AWG AWG
0.25 A 840 ft. (256 m) 1,335 ft. (407 m) 2,126 ft. (648 m) 3,382 ft. (1,031 m) 12 Ohms
0.50 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.75 A 280 ft. (85 m) 445 ft. (136 m) 709 ft. (216 m) 1,127 ft. (344 m) 4 Ohms
1.00 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms
1.25 A 168 ft. (51 m) 267 ft. (81 m) 425 ft. (130 m) 676 ft. (206 m) 2.4 Ohms
1.50 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms
1.75 A 120 ft. (37 m) 191 ft. (58 m) 304 ft. (93 m) 483 ft. (147 m) 1.71 Ohms
2.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms
2.25 A 93 ft. (28 m) 148 ft. (45 m) 236 ft. (72 m) 376 ft. (115 m) 1.33 Ohms
2.50 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
2.75 A 76 ft. (23 m) 121 ft. (37 m) 193 ft. (59 m) 307 ft. (94 m) 1.09 Ohms
3.00 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm
Note:
• Max Distance = distance from SPS or RPS to last appliance.
• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in locations that could be exposed to higher
temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of
potential exposure.

10.3 SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines

10.3.1 Guidelines
Review the following guidelines for NACs before you begin NAC field wiring.
• All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) to 12 AWG (maximum).
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit. The supervisory current is 2.03 mA at 24 VDC.
• The nominal voltage rating is 24 VDC, 2 V p-p ripple (maximum).
• The total available current from the SPS is 9 A, unless it is used for REGULATED
• 24 VDC notification appliances, where the SPS/RPS is rated for 4Amps notification. Any current used for card power by modules plugged into the
PDI, as well as any auxiliary 24 VDC current, must be deducted from the total available current.
• Terminal designations “+” and “-” are for the alarm state.
• All 4901-, 4903- and 4904- series appliances are Special Application with SPS. SPS is rated 9A, 3A per circuit. SPS regulated rating per UL864 is 4A
maximum per SPS. Compatible TrueAlert non-addressable appliances for NACs are:
- 4901-series Horn1
- 4903-series A/V1
- 4903-series S/V1
- 4904-series V/O1
- 4906-Multi-Candela-series A/V, V/O, S/V, and others1
- 49CMT-series, Multi-Tone 1,2
- 49CMTV-series, Multi-Tone/Multi-Candela 1, 2
1
A maximum of 70 appliances can be supported per circuit.
2
Each 49CMT and 49CMTV series appliance counts as 2.7 regular appliances and no more than 25 49CMT or 20 49CMTV-series appliances may be
placed on one circuit.

page 122 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

10.4 SPS NAC Wiring

10.4.1 Class A NAC Wiring

To connect the SPS to reverse-polarity, non-addressable notification appliances using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure
81.
1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the “B+”, “B-”, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral
notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on the same NAC circuit of TB1 of the SPS.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the 10 K, ½ W, brown/black/orange resistor (378-030) on each unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals. No
external end-of-line resistor is needed for circuits in use.

BLK

RED 12 AWG to 18AWG

TYPICAL
APPLIANCE

IMPORTANT: Conductors must test RED BLK

free of all grounds.
TYPICAL Leave the 378-030 EOL
APPLIANCE
Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W;
brown/black/orange) on
unused circuits

RED BLK

Ferrite beads
required for RF immunity
to CE specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129. NAC2 NAC3

3
2 P1
1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1 NAC1 NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

Figure 81: Class A NAC Wiring

10.4.2 Class B NAC Wiring

To connect the SPS to appliances using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 82.
1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral
notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is not allowed. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the EOLR harness (10K ohm, 1/2W: P/N 733-894, PID# 4081-9008).

page 123 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the factory installed EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on each unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-”
terminals.

EOL Harness
10K 1/2W (133-894)

RED BLK
RED
Leave the factory installed
TYPICAL EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½
APPLIANCE W; brown/black/orange) on
RED BLK
RED
unused circuits
IMPORTANT: Conductors must test
TYPICAL
free of all grounds. APPLIANCE

RED BLK
BLK
12 AWG to 18AWG

Ferrite bead NAC2 NAC3

required for RF
immunity to CE 3
2 P1
specified levels. Use 1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
kit 4100-5129.
NAC1 NAC1 NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

Figure 82: Class B Wiring

Note:
• Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label.
• Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.

10.5 SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines

10.5.1 IDNet Wiring

Up to 250 IDNet initiating devices are supported on the SPS IDNet channel. The SPS supports both Class A and Class B wiring.
Class A wiring allows IDNet appliances to communicate with the SPS even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring
requires that two wires are routed from the SPS to each IDNet appliance, and then back again to the SPS.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require
end-of-line resistors, because each IDNet appliance communicates directly to the SPS.

10.5.2 Guidelines
Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before installing the cards.
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (762 m) for 126-250 devices, or 4000 feet (1220 m) if 125 or fewer devices are used.
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The maximum total wire allowed is 10,000 feet, or 0.58uF.
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance
from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.
• Use supplied ferrite beads with the SPS. Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite beads as shown in Figure 83.

page 124 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 83: Loop

Wiring as Shown

10.6 SPS IDNet Wiring

10.6.1 Class A Wiring

1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral IDNet
appliance.
2. Route wire from the first IDNet appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last IDNet appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on TB1 of the SPS.

IMPORTANT:
Max. allowed wire capacitance is .58uF. IDNet
IDNet
Maximum distance to any device is 2500 DEVICE
DEVICE

feet (126-250 devices) or 4000 feet (up to IDNet LOOP

(CLASS A / STYLE G)
125 devices) IDNet
IDNet
DEVICE
DEVICE
Class A wiring must consider the above
limits under worst-case fault conditions.
Neither the "A" or "B" terminals may IDNet
IDNet
exceed the distances noted above. DEVICE
DEVICE

Ferrite beads
required.

3
2 P1
B+ B- SHLD A+ A- 1

IDNet

Figure 84: Class A Wiring

10.6.2 Class B Wiring

1. On TB1, jumper B+ to A+, and jumper B- to A-.
2. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the A+, A-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the SPS to a junction box. Begin “T” tapping at the
junction box. The maximum distance between the SPS and an IDNet appliance is 2,500 feet (762 m). The maximum wiring distance for any
IDNet circuit is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) or 0.58 uF.

Figure 85 shows Class B wiring.

page 125 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

IDNet LINES TO DEVICES

(CLASS B / STYLE 4)

Ferrite bead
required.

IMPORTANT:
3
Max. allowed wire load is 10,000 feet 2 P1
total or .58uF. Maximum distance to B+ B- SHLD A+ A- 1

any device is 2500 feet (126-250 IDNet

devices) or 4000 feet (up to 125
devices)

Figure 85: Class B Wiring

10.7 SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

10.7.1 Guidelines
• All wiring is 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
• All wiring is power-limited.
• When a NAC is configured as an auxiliary power circuit, no end-of-line resistor is used.
• Auxiliary power may be taken from the dedicated auxiliary power tap or from an unused NAC.
• If auxiliary power is taken from NAC terminals, the NAC must be configured as an auxiliary power point type in the 4100 Programmer.
• Remove end-of-line resistors from NACs when used for auxiliary power.
• External wiring from the dedicated auxiliary power tap is not supervised unless an end-of-line relay is wired coil to auxiliary power, and Normally
Open contacts are monitored by a system power point. Relay current must be considered as part of the load. When NACs are used as aux. power
taps, they are supervised for overcurrent or short-circuit faults.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module 2081-9044 wherever wire enters or exits the building. A
maximum of four 2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel.
• Voltage rating: 24 VDC (nominal), 2 V P-P ripple (maximum).
• The following devices are compatible with 24VDC aux. power:
- 2088-series relays and door holders
- 2098-series four-wire smoke detectors
- 2190-series monitor and signal ZAMs
- 4090-series IDNet ZAMs
- 4098-series four-wire smoke detectors and duct detectors
- 2190-9039 Printer
- 4190-9050/9051 4-20 mA ZAMs
- 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• The total auxiliary current available is 5 A. The total current available for the entire SPS is 9A (special application) or 4A regulated 24VDC, including
NAC, auxiliary, and card power.

page 126 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

10.7.2 Wiring
The SPS can connect to auxiliary power appliances via the dedicated auxiliary power tap (TB3). If more power is needed, any of the three NAC outputs
can be used for auxiliary power.

AUXILIARY AUXILIARY AUXILIARY

POWER POWER POWER
Ferrite bead
Required for RF
12 AWG to 18 AWG immunity to CE
specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129.
TB2 B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

Devices

NAC points must be

reconfigured as
auxiliary power Primar y Return
output points in the
programmer

SPS TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2

Dedicated auxiliary
power screw terminal 4090-9117 4090-9117
(configured in the 24V
ISOLATOR 0V ISOLATOR
Programmer)
To SPS/
RPS

Class A aux power wiring requires the use

of 4090-9117 IDNet Power Isolators, as
AUX POWER
shown above.
0V 24V TB3

12 AWG to 18 AWG

AUXILIARY
POWER

Figure 86: Auxiliary Power Wiring

Figure Notes:
1. Maximum allowed NAC current consumption (aux power plus NACs): 9A (Special Application) or 4A regulated 24V dc.
2. Maximum per NAC: 3 A
3. Maximum allowed auxiliary power current consumption: 5A (total supply).
4. Maximum per auxiliary output: 2 A
5. Class A wiring is possible only if a 4090-9117 Power Isolator is used.
6. International systems require ferrite beads. Use kit 4100-5129.

10.8 SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring

10.8.1 Guidelines
The SPS includes one on-board, programmable relay.
• All wiring must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
• When power through auxiliary contacts provided by the SPS, wiring is power-limited.
• When power through auxiliary contacts is not provided by the SPS, use an in-line fuse (208-165). If the power source is not power-limited to the
requirements of UL864, wiring is to be segregated to the non-power-limited spaces of the cabinet.
• The relay circuit is not supervised.
• The relay circuit is rated to switch 2 A at 30 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive load.

page 127 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• Relay contacts are Form C dry contacts. Suppression is provided to Earth. Do not switch voltages greater than rating, or damage may result.

10.8.2 Wiring
Figure 87 shows SPS auxiliary relay wiring.

TB2 B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

SPS

Dedicated auxiliary
relay terminal block

NO C NC TB4

12 AWG to 18AWG

NORMALLY
CLOSED
COMMON
NORMALLY
OPEN

Figure 87: Auxiliary Relay Wiring

page 128 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

11 EPS with IDNet 2

This chapter describes how the EPS with an IDNet 2 card is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure
the EPS is installed correctly.

11.1 EPS Specifications

11.1.1 Card Specifications

Auxiliary/
IDNAC NAC
Terminals

LEDs

Trouble Scroll
Button
A 4 Pin Harness
B
Address C Card Power /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Switch D Comms
E
CH1
RUI+ Earth CH2 Connection
CH3 to PDI
Detect COM

IDNET 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IDNet 2
Card

Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection
to Bridge

Connection to
Batterries
A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

Earth Detect Jumper

Figure 88: EPS Card Layout

32°F - 120°F (0°C-49°C)
Operating Conditions
Up to 93% relative humidity at 90°F (32°C), non-condensing.
AC Input Specifications: 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6 A
Note: Maximum circuit breaker is 20A. 220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A
DC Output Specifications: 29 V @ 9 A
Electrical Up to 5A normal standby (AUX, "Card Power" and Backplane Power). Any non-alarm current must be subtracted from 9A
Specifications alarm current.
Standby – No alarms, SLCs normal: 135 mA / Alarm - 12A @ 24V
DC Input
With IDNet 2: 235 mA
(battery standby)
Per IDNet/IDNAC device: 0.8 mA
Internal Battery Charges up to 50 Ah (ULC-S527) or 115 Ah (UL-864 Listing) sealed lead-acid batteries connected to the power supply.
Charger High Voltage Output: 29 V

page 129 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Output Current Limit: 3.3 A

IDNAC SLCs 29.5V maximum @ 3A per circuit; 4,000 bits/second
Earth Fault Earth fault detection is 10k minimum to any circuit.
SNAC wiring fault
Short circuit detection is 5k ohms maximum for SNAC. Open circuit detection is 15k.
Detection
Battery Standby Battery standby requirements are dependent on system configuration. The 4100ES can support up to 115 Ah batteries
(UL) and 50 Ah batteries (ULC). With 115 Ah batteries, a system could be configured to draw 3.8A for 24 hours, followed
(sealed lead-acid
by 15 minutes at 9.375A. Or a configuration with 0.375A for 24 hours and 5 minutes alarm at 9.375 would require 12.7 Ah
batteries)
batteries or larger. Refer to Sales Engineering Calculation Tool for specific configurations.

11.2 EPS Configuration

11.2.1 Setting the EPS Address

The DIP Switch SW2 is used to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job (see the section on Programming for more information).
From left to right, these switches are designated as SW2-1 through SW2-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW2-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the 4100 CPU. Set this switch to
ON.
• SW2-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address within the FACP. Refer to Figure 90 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of
the possible card addresses.
You must set these switches to the value assigned to the module by the Panel Programmer.

page 130 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Most Significant Bit

Least Significant Bit

ON
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)

Figure 89: DIP Switch SW2

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Figure 90: EPS Card Addresses

page 131 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

11.2.2 Earth Connect Jumper

The EPS Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable Earth Fault detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3

Function Enabled

3 2 1
P18

Function Disabled

Figure 91: Earth Connect Jumper Positions

Earth Fault detection is set to active on one EPS per battery location. A battery location is any cabinet connected to the master 4100 communications
channel without a TIC. A transponder cabinet is another battery location. Only ONE earth fault circuit should be active on all power supplies (EPS, TPS,
SPS, RPS) within a battery location. Disable earth fault detection on all other power supplies at a battery location. Any system that includes one or more
EPS MUST have earth detection from an EPS.

11.2.3 Battery Disconnect Jumper

Jumper P16 selects Low Battery operation.
• Jumper in Top position (pins 2-3) will cause panel shutdown when batteries are depleted.
• Jumper in Bottom position (pins 1-2) will allow panel to continue operating.
For S527 compliance, jumper must be installed to top position of P16.

Note: When jumper is set to pins 2-3, EPS will not power-up from battery.

P16
Shut Down
When 3
Depleted 2 Continue
Operation
1 When Depleted

Figure 92: Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions

page 132 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

11.3 EPS IDNet 2 Configuration

11.3.1 Setting the Address

The DIP Switch SW1 is used to set the IDNet 2 address as identified in the Panel Programmer job (see the section on Programming for more
information). From left to right, these switches are designated as SW1-1 through SW1-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW1-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the 4100 CPU. Set this switch to
ON.
• SW1-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address within the FACP. Refer to Figure 94 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of
the possible card addresses.
You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the Panel Programmer.

page 133 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Most Significant Bit

Least Significant Bit

ON
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)

Figure 93: DIP Switch SW1

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Figure 94: 4100-3109 Card Addresses

page 134 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

11.4 Connections

11.4.1 Connection to the Power Distribution Module

The EPS is powered by the Power Distribution Module (PDM). The PDM takes power directly from a dedicated AC line and the two backup batteries,
and distributes power to each bay in the cabinet.
To connect the EPS to the PDM using Harness 734-257:
1. Ensure that the PDM is connected to an incoming 120 VAC power source. Keep the AC wires to the right side of the cabinet, in the non-
power-limited area, and at least one inch away from all other wires.
2. Connect the harness connector to the PDM.
3. Connect the separate Red and Black wires (with Yellow female terminations) to Plugs P2 (Black) and P3 (Red) on the EPS.
4. Connect the White and Black wires, which terminate together in a White snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the
EPS assembly.

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
Bottom view GROUND
of the EPS assembly 120 V
NEUTRAL
HARNESS
(734-257) BACK BOX
(734-258)* GROUND
SCREW
Bulkhead connector
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248;
BLACK WIRE see below)*
RED WIRE

Second bulkhead HARNESS 733-015

connector here in 120 V TO TRANSFORMER TO 24 V BATTERY
THROUGH BULKHEAD
220/ 230/240 V CONNECTOR
version 566-248
PDM TERMINAL
230 VAC
220 VAC

240 VAC

BLOCK
NEUT

50/60 Hz
2.3 A

Figure 95: PDM/Battery Connections

11.5 Troubleshooting

11.5.1 LED Trouble Indicator Overview

The code produced by the lit indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble that is either occurring on the System or on the SLC Channels. See Table 23 for
the LED definitions.
See Table 24 and Table 25 for the LEDs and their codes.

page 135 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 23: The 8 EPS indicator LEDs

These 5 yellow LEDs are used to signal various trouble conditions on

LED:
the EPS and its SLC. See the troubleshooting section for LED system
A, B, C, D, E codes.
LED: LEDs
These LEDs report any troubles on the corresponding SLC channels.
CH1, CH2, CH3
Trouble
LED COMM Indicates a 4100 Comms trouble. Scroll
Button A
B
C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D
E
CH1
CH2
CH3
Scroll Push Button The “Trouble Scroll” button to is used to scroll through multiple COM
(SW1) troubles, since only one trouble can be displayed at a time.

Figure 96: LED Location

11.5.2 System Trouble LED Codes

System troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E.

Table 24: System Trouble LED Codes

A B C D E Description:

No Trouble: There are no troubles detected on the system.

AC Fail: The AC power is disconnected but the battery is working.

Low Battery: The battery charge is under 22 V.

Battery Cutout: The Battery charge is below 20V. At this point if jumper P16 is set to “battery
disconnect when depleted” the system will shut down.
Depleted/Missing Battery: If jumper P16 is not set to “battery disconnect when depleted” this
trouble will appear when the battery charge is below 20 V. This code will also appear if the system
cannot detect the battery.

Charger Trouble: There is a trouble with the battery charger.

Card Overcurrent: The EPS module is drawing too much current.

Negative Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire.

Positive Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.

Negative Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire

Positive Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.

City Circuit 1 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit one has bee triggered.

City Circuit 2 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit two has bee triggered.

page 136 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 24: System Trouble LED Codes

A B C D E Description:
AuxNAC Open: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit
is open.

AuxNAC Short: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit
is experiencing a short circuit.

AuxNAC Overcurrent: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC
circuit drawing too much current.

Unassigned.

Unassigned.

11.5.3 SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes

SLC Channel troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E, as well as LEDs CH1, CH2, and CH3.
The channel LEDs, CH1, CH2, and CH3 indicate the channel which is experiencing the trouble. For example, if the CH1 LED is lit, the trouble is occurring
on SLC channel 1.
The lettered LEDs, A to E, describe the trouble.

Table 25: SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes

CH1 CH2 CH3 A B C D E Description:

IDNAC Channel Fail: The channel is not responding.

IDNAC Short Circuit: There is a short circuit on the channel.

IDNAC Duplicate Device: There are 2 devices on the channel that

have the same address.

IDNAC Missing device: There is a device programmed on the channel

that it cannot detect.

IDNAC Extra Device: The channel is detecting the address of a device

that has not been programmed.

IDNAC Wrong Device: The channel is detecting a device that had

been programed as the wrong “type”.

IDNAC Controller Fail: The channel can no longer detect the

controller.

IDNAC Address Out of Range: There is a device with an

unsupported address on the channel.

IDNAC Isolator Trouble: An isolator on the channel is open.

IDNAC Overcurrent: A device on the Channel is drawing too much

current.

IDNAC Earth Trouble: There is a positive or a negative earth fault on

the channel.

Unassigned

Unassigned

page 137 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

11.5.4 Trouble Messages

Table 26 explains the EPS trouble messages that may appear on the FACP display.

Table 26: EPS Trouble Messages

Message Definition
AC Fail AC power is not present or is too low for proper system operation
Low Battery The battery voltage is below the 24 V nominal level by 10% or more.
Depleted/Missing Battery The battery is either below 20 V or completely undetected.
Card Overcurrent The EPS is drawing more current than it should. Check for faults on the circuit.
The battery charger is either defective or being heavily loaded by batteries. Read charger current at front panel,
if charger current is approximately 3 A, batteries are likely loading the charger. Remove battery connection and
Charger measure the output of the EPS. If the output is 27.6 (or close, temperature dependent), there is a possibility
of depleted batteries or a bad set of batteries. Allow batteries to charge or replace them if they do not take a
charge.
Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNAC channel) are one
Extra Device
the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.
Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display
indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…75%), and then shows the results of the
Earth Fault Search search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. EPS
circuits (IDNet, IDNAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during
the search.
Appears when a short is detected on the IDNAC channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is
Short Circuit
removed.
Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are
Channel Fail communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the IDNAC
channel.

page 138 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

12 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

This chapter describes the EPS wiring. This includes the wiring of the IDNet 2 card.

12.1 EPS Wiring Overview

12.1.1 General Wiring Guidelines

• Conductors must test free of all grounds.
• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• If shielded wire is used:
- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.
- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earthground.
• Underground wiring must be free of all water.
• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient Suppressor should be used on monitor
points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy
resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the
original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth
detection per NFPA780.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

12.1.2 Power-Limited Guidelines

• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in the shaded areas shown in Figure 97.
• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded shown in Figure 97, with the exception of City wiring. Excess slack
should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor
power-limited wiring to tie points.
• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must be provided by a power-limited power
supply listed for fire-protective signaling use.

page 139 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Conduit Entrance for

Non-Power Limited
Conduit Entrance for Wiring
Power-Limited Wiring

Non-Power Limited
Wiring (Route in
Power-Limited Wiring Shaded Area Only)

Tie Point
(Location
May Vary)

Figure 97: Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines

12.2 EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring

12.2.1 Wiring Overview

The EPS has three SLCs for power and communication wiring.
Each SLC powers and communicates with up to 127 IDNAC devices. The EPS is wired to compatible devices and appliances, such as the TrueAlert ES
and TrueAlert Addressable lines (both multi and fixed candela), using Class B circuitry.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. EPS wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not
required.

12.2.2 IDNAC Wiring Guidelines

Review the following guidelines for IDNACs before you begin the field wiring.
• Only IDNAC and other compatible devices are allowed on the SLCs.
• Maximum of 127 devices or 139 unit loads per channel. The maximum number of visuals that can be synchronized on one circuit is 127.
• Maximum of six isolators between any appliance and SLC terminals. Maximum 12 isolators per SLC.
• Maximum 30 devices connected directly to any isolator terminal pair.
• The required wire is UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair). This wiring must have a capacitive rating of less than 60 pF/ft and a minimum 3 twists (turns)
per foot.
• All wiring is 18 AWG to 12 AWG.
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit.
• Maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) per channel. Maximum wire length from panel to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
• The nominal voltage rating is 29 VDC.
• The total available current from the EPS is 9 A.

page 140 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• All visible appliances wired from an EPS are synchronized to appliances on SPS, XPS, TPS, 4009A, 4009T and other EPS within the system.
Appliances wired from TrueAlert Adapter (4905-9816) are not synchronized to other system appliances.

12.2.3 IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines

Note: TrueAlert ES speaker appliances supervise connected audio circuits for open-circuit conditions and report those troubles to the host FACP
through the EPS. They can also detect short circuit conditions, but the EPS reports such events as an open circuit. The panel reports these conditions
as AUDIO WIRING TROUBLE. The amplifier electronics and power supply of a connected audio NAC must still supervise that circuit for short circuit con-
ditions and earth faults.

Do not mix TrueAlert ES speakers with conventional speakers on an audio NAC.

IDNAC wire length limitations dictate the maximum audio NAC wire run length between a TrueAlert ES speaker and the connected 4100ES amplifier.
The maximum IDNAC wire run length from the EPS to a device, with a Repeater extension is 8,000 feet. Because the maximum distance between the
amplifier and the EPS is 2500 feet over RUI/RUI+, the total allowable distance between the amplifier and the TrueAlert ES device speaker is 10,500 feet.
This distance may be further restricted by the Speaker Circuit Wiring Distance Tables of the connected amplifier.
CLASS B Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 127 IDNAC speakers to Class B wired audio NAC. A Class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert
ES speakers can employ T-Tap and Wire Branch wiring topologies.
Do not connect an End-Of-Line Resistor to a class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert ES speakers.
CLASS A Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 70 TrueAlert ES speakers to a Class A audio NAC. Speakers must be wired in a standard Class A loop
fashion.
Except as noted above, audio NAC wiring connected to TrueAlert ES speakers must follow the requirements of the connected 4100ES amplifier.

12.2.4 Ferrite Beads

Ferrite beads must be used for Class B wiring.

Figure 98: Ferrite Bead Installation

1. Install the ferrite bead close to the EPS field wiring terminals for lowest radiated emissions (before the wires leave the box).
2. Loop the wires through the bead as shown.

12.3 EPS Wiring Tables

12.3.1 Class B Wiring Tables

Use the following tables to calculate the load.
TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances must use Table 30 in place of Table 28.
Maximum wiring distance is the shorter of the distance limits as calculated by alarm current voltage drop or by reaching the communications distance
limit.

Table 27: UTP Wiring Limit Based on Alarm Current

Distance to the Last Appliance

Alarm Current
20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
0.050 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

page 141 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 27: UTP Wiring Limit Based on Alarm Current

Distance to the Last Appliance

Alarm Current
20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
0.100 2644 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.150 1763 ft 2802 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.200 1322 ft 2102 ft 3342 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.250 1058 ft 1681 ft 2674 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.300 881 ft 1401 ft 2228 ft 3542 ft 4000 ft
0.350 755 ft 1201 ft 1910 ft 3036 ft 4000 ft
0.400 661 ft 1051 ft 1671 ft 2657 ft 4000 ft
0.450 588 ft 934 ft 1485 ft 2362 ft 3756
0.500 529 ft 841 ft 1337 ft 2125 ft 3380
0.750 353 ft 560 ft 891 ft 1417 ft 2254 ft
1.000 264 ft 420 ft 668 ft 1063 ft 1690 ft
1.250 212 ft 336 ft 535 ft 850 ft 1352 ft
1.500 176 ft 280 ft 446 ft 708 ft 1127 ft
1.750 151 ft 240 ft 382 ft 607 ft 966 ft
2.000 132 ft 210 ft 334 ft 531 ft 845 ft
2.250 118 ft 187 ft 297 ft 472 ft 751 ft
2.500 106 ft 168 ft 267 ft 425 ft 676 ft
2.750 96 ft 153 ft 243 ft 386 ft 615 ft
3.000 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft
Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft

Table 28: UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication

Distance to the Last Appliance

Line Impedance(Ohms) Devices
20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
14.54 1 1252 ft 2038 ft 3241 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
12.96 5 1142 ft 1815 ft 2887 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
11.38 10 1003 ft 1595 ft 2536 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
10.14 15 893 ft 1420 ft 2258 ft 3590 ft 4000 ft
9.12 20 804 ft 1278 ft 2033 ft 3231ft 4000 ft
8.28 25 730 ft 1160 ft 1845 ft 2934 ft 4000 ft
7.58 30 668 ft 1061 ft 1688 ft 2683 ft 4000 ft
6.97 35 614 ft 977 ft 1553 ft 2469 ft 3928 ft
6.45 40 568 ft 904 ft 1437 ft 2285 ft 3634 ft
6.00 45 528 ft 840 ft 1336 ft 2124 ft 3378 ft
5.60 50 493 ft 784 ft 1247 ft 1982 ft 3152 ft
5.24 55 462 ft 734 ft 1168 ft 1856 ft 2952 ft
4.92 60 434 ft 690 ft 1097 ft 1744 ft 2774 ft
4.75 63 419 ft 665 ft 1058 ft 1682 ft 2675 ft
4.64 65 409 ft 650 ft 1034 ft 1643 ft 2613 ft
4.38 70 386 ft 614 ft 976 ft 1552 ft 2468 ft
4.15 75 366 ft 581 ft 924 ft 1469 ft 2337 ft
3.94 80 347 ft 551 ft 877 ft 1394 ft 2217 ft
3.74 85 330 ft 524 ft 833 ft 1325 ft 2107 ft
3.56 90 314 ft 499 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2006 ft
3.40 95 299 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1203 ft 1913 ft
3.24 100 286 ft 454 ft 723 ft 1149 ft 1827 ft
3.10 105 273 ft 435 ft 691 ft 1099 ft 1748 ft
2.97 110 262 ft 416 ft 662 ft 1052 ft 1673 ft
2.85 115 251 ft 399 ft 634 ft 1009 ft 1604 ft

page 142 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 28: UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication

Distance to the Last Appliance

Line Impedance(Ohms) Devices
20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG
2.73 120 241 ft 383 ft 609 ft 968 ft 1539 ft
2.58 127 228 ft 362 ft 576 ft 915 ft 1456 ft
Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft

Table 29: Ohms per 1000 ft

Gage Ohms/1000 ft
20 AWG 11.347
18 AWG 7.137
16 AWG 4.488
14 AWG 2.8230
12 AWG 1.7750
Note: Although the required wire for IDNAC circuits is twisted pair (controlled impedance) wiring, some applications will wish to take advantage of
existing wiring that is not twisted pair. This is only allowed if both conductors of the IDNAC circuit reside in the same metal conduit, and only under cer-
tain conditions. Check with your local sales office before using wiring that is not twisted pair.

Table 30: UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication

Distance to the Last Appliance

Devices
20AWG 18AWG 16AWG 14AWG 12AWG
1 1218 ft 1936 ft 3079 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
5 1028 ft 1634 ft 2599 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
10 853 ft 1356 ft 2156 ft 3428 ft 4000 ft
15 715 ft 1137 ft 1807 ft 2873 ft 4000 ft
20 603 ft 959 ft 1525 ft 2424 ft 3855 ft
25 548 ft 871 ft 1385 ft 2201 ft 3500 ft
30 501 ft 797 ft 1266 ft 2013 ft 3201 ft
35 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1853 ft 2946 ft
40 427 ft 678 ft 1078 ft 1714 ft 2726 ft
45 397 ft 631 ft 1002 ft 1593 ft 2534 ft
50 370 ft 588 ft 935 ft 1487 ft 2365 ft
55 347 ft 551 ft 876 ft 1393 ft 2215 ft
60 326 ft 518 ft 823 ft 1308 ft 2081 ft
63 314 ft 500 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2007 ft
65 307 ft 488 ft 776 ft 1233 ft 1960 ft
70 290 ft 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1852 ft
75 275 ft 436 ft 694 ft 1103 ft 1753 ft
80 261 ft 414 ft 658 ft 1046 ft 1663 ft
85 248 ft 394 ft 626 ft 994 ft 1581 ft
90 236 ft 375 ft 596 ft 947 ft 1505 ft
95 225 ft 357 ft 568 ft 903 ft 1436 ft
100 215 ft 341 ft 543 ft 862 ft 1371 ft
105 206 ft 326 ft 519 ft 825 ft 1311 ft
110 197 ft 313 ft 497 ft 790 ft 1256 ft
115 189 ft 300 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1204 ft
120 181 ft 288 ft 457 ft 726 ft 1155 ft
127 171 ft 272 ft 432 ft 687 ft 1092 ft
Wiring distances must not exceed 4000 ft

page 143 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

12.4 EPS Wiring to Devices

12.4.1 Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices

To connect the EPS to appliances using Class B wiring:
1. Route the wire from the “+” and the “-”outputs on the EPS IDNAC terminal blocks (TB1, TB2 or TB3) to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral
notification appliance.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is allowed. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each IDNAC output you want to use.
Note: Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.

IDNAC IDNAC IDNAC

Device Device Device

IDNAC IDNAC IDNAC

Device Device Device

Ferrite
Bead

+ + - - + + - - + + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

Figure 99: Class B Wiring

12.4.2 4009 IDNAC Repeater

Using a 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends the possible wiring distance and increases the current capacity of an IDNAC channel. Each IDNAC repeater has
a capacity of 3A, and regenerates the IDNAC signal. Models 4009-9601 (platinum enclosure) and 4009-9602 (red enclosure) are compatible with the
EPS. Refer to installation instructions 579-1019 for wiring details. All IDNAC devices wired to the IDNAC repeater are synchronized to IDNAC devices
wired to other EPS within the system.

12.4.3 Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI)

To wire an IDNAC as a Class A circuit, one or more DCAI modules (4100-6103) is required. Each DCAI includes 2 circuits, Class A, with fault isolation.
Refer to 579-1029 for wiring details and installation instructions. Synchronization of audible/visible devices is maintained with the use of DCAI.
TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances wired in a Class A circuit must use Table 30 here in place of Table 4 in publication 579-1029
(4100 ES/4007 ES Installation Instructions; 4100-6103 DCAI Card). The wiring limit distances shown in this table apply to maximum wiring loop length.
The final maximum loop length is the shorter of this value or the value from Table 27.

page 144 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

12.4.4 Calculating Class B wiring with Isolators

When using Isolators, the maximum wire distance of each of these SLC branches from panel to any device is the smaller of the values obtained from
Table 28, and the Equation 1. See Table 29 for the ohms per 1000 ft.
Equation 1: Maximum SLC Wire Branch Length Based on Appliance Alarm Current Load

Distance (feet) = 6V - (.1 ohm * number of isolators on branch * branch alarm amps)

2 * (resistance per foot) * (branch alarm amps)

• Add the alarm loads of all the devices on an SLC wire branch and apply to Equation 1.
• Add the unit loads for all devices on an SLC wire branch and the number of isolators and apply to Table 28.
Maximum wire resistance protected by 1 isolator is 1.5 ohm (total, both wires).
Wire the devices as instructed in the “Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices” section.

TO OTHER TO OTHER
DEVICES DEVICES

PORT PORT
4905-9929 2 4905-9929 2
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
PORT PORT
1 1

APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE

TO OTHER
DEVICES

PORT PORT
4905-9929 2 1 4905-9929
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
PORT PORT
1 2

TO OTHER
DEVICES
Ferrite
Bead

+ + - - + + - - + + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

Figure 100: Class B Wiring With Isolators

12.5 EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

12.5.1 AUX/ NAC Terminal

The AUX/NAC terminal block is located on the top right corner of the EPS.
Through the ES Panel Programmer, this point can be configured as either a 24V Auxiliary (AUX) power or as a simple reverse polarity Notification
Appliance Circuit (NAC).

page 145 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

IDNAC1 +IDNAC2
+ - - +IDNAC3
+ - - +AUX-
+ + - -
Auxiliary Power
Terminal Block
IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 AUX

Figure 101: AUX/NAC Terminal

Table 31: AUX/NAC Wiring Specification

Voltage
24V Special Application
rating:
Rating: 2 A, maximum
TYPICAL APPLIANCES

733-894 NAC -
10K EOLR

NAC+

B+
B-
18 AWG (min.)
Wiring gage: IDNAC1 +IDNAC2
+ - - +IDNAC3
+ - - +AUX-
to 12 AWG (max.) + + - -

Figure 102: Simple NAC Wiring

Wiring Notes:
1. All wiring from the AUX/NAC is power limited.
2. Conductors must test free of all grounds and stray voltages before connection to appliances and panel.
3. Terminate Class B NACs as shown using 733- 894. For Canadian applications, mount end-of-line resistor to Simplex-US Model 431537 EOL plate in
accordance with ULC-S527.
4. If circuit is terminated with a 10k EOLR, at the terminals, remove this resistor before wiring.
5. If wiring is routed outside the building, use of a listed secondary protector is required. Use Simplex 2081- 9028 or 2081-9044. A protector must
be installed at each building exit/entrance. Each 2081-9028 adds 0.2 ohms wiring resistance. 2081-9044 adds 6 ohms wiring resistance, and will
greatly reduce wiring distance.

Table 32: NAC Wiring Limits

Alarm Current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line Resistance (Ohms)
0.25 617 ft 981 ft 1560 ft 2480 ft 3944 ft 14.00
0.50 308 ft 490 ft 780 ft 1240 ft 1972 ft 7.00
0.75 206 ft 327 ft 520 ft 827 ft 1315 ft 4.67
1.00 154 ft 245 ft 390 ft 620 ft 986 ft 3.50

page 146 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 32: NAC Wiring Limits

Alarm Current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line Resistance (Ohms)
1.25 123 ft 196 ft 312 ft 496 ft 789 ft 2.80
1.50 103 ft 163 ft 260 ft 413 ft 657 ft 2.33
1.75 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 2.00
2.00 77 ft 123 ft 195 ft 310 ft 493 ft 1.75
Note:
This Chart indicates the maximum distance for 1/4 -2A loads. Wiring distance is from the panel terminals to the last appliance. Use of a 2081-9044
protector reduces wiring distance.
Note: Output of AUX or NAC is 24V nominal. Minimum voltage is 19.5 @ full load and minimum battery; maximum is 31.5V at light load, high AC line.
Aux Loads include 4601-9101 Annunciator, 4100-96xx series Annunciators, 4090 series of IDNet ZAMs and IAMs and any Listed device operating
within the output limits of the AUX. Calculate wiring loss for actual devices used. Compatible Appliances include 4904 series of free-run strobes, 4901
series non-smartsync horns, 4098 series TrueAlarm Sounder Base, 4090-9005 and -9006 SRP and 4009 NAC extenders, used in reverse-polarity activa-
tion mode.

page 147 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

12.6 IDNet 2 Card Wiring

12.6.1 Wiring Overview

Each output from the IDNet 2 card can be wired as either an isolated Class A circuit or as two isolated Class B circuits.
Class A wiring provides an alternate communication path that allows communication to all devices to be maintained when a single open circuit
fault occurs. Class A wiring requires two wires to be routed from the IDNet 2 Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to each device, and then back to the IDNet 2
Secondary Terminals (A+, A-). Wiring is in/out, “T” tapping is not allowed.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. IDNet 2 wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not
required.

12.6.2 Wiring Parameters

Table 33 identifies the IDNet 2 card wiring parameters that must be considered when installing this card. For additional wiring information see the
applicable installation documentation, or contact your authorized Simplex Product Supplier.

Table 33: IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters

Wiring Capacitance Parameters

Parameter Value
Maximum Supported Channel Capacitance; Total of both The sum of line-to-line capacitance, plus the capacitance of either line-to-shield (if shield
loops is present) = 0.6 µF (600 nF)
Capacitance between IDNet SLCs wiring (between wires of
1 µF maximum (this is for multiple IDNet loops)
the same polarity; plus to plus, minus to minus)
Wiring Distance Limits (see note below)
Class B Wiring, Total Channel Wiring Class A Wiring, Total Channel Wiring
Channel Loading Parameters, Including T-Taps Parameters
Up to 125 devices 126 to 250 devices Up to 125 devices 126 to 250 devices
Total Loop Resistance 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum
4000 ft (1219 m) per
2500ft (762 m) per loop,
18 AWG (0.82 mm2) 12 500 ft (3810m) loop, 12 500ft (3810m)
10 000ft (3048m) total
total
16 AWG (1.31 mm2) 5000 ft (1524 m) per
2500ft (762 m) per loop,
14 AWG (2.08 mm2) 12 500 ft (3810m) loop, 12 500ft (3810m)
10 000ft (3048m) total
12 AWG (3.31 mm2) total
Note: Maximum wiring distance is determined by either reaching the maximum resistance, the maximum capacitance, or the stated maximum dis-
tance, whichever occurs first. Class A maximum distances are to the farthest device on the loop from either “B” or “A” terminals. For Class B wiring, the
maximum distance to the farthest device is limited to the stated Class A wiring distances. Shielded wire is not required. Twisted wire is recommended
for improved noise immunity.
Note: External wiring must be shielded (for lightning suppression) and 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors
must be installed at building exit and entrance locations.
Wiring Considerations using Capacitance: Each protector adds 0.006 μF across the connected line.
2081-9044 Overvoltage
Resistance: Each protector adds 3 Ω per line of series resistance; both IDNet lines are protected; 6 Ω per
Protectors(2081-9044 is UL listed
protector will be added to total loop resistance.
to Standard 1459, Standard for
Telephone Equipment) Maximum distance of a single protected wiring run is 3270 ft (1 km).
Refer to document number 574-832: 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation Instructions for additional
information.

12.6.3 Class A Wiring

To wire the Loop terminals as a Class A circuit:
1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “A” position, as shown in Figure 104.
- Loop A= Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card
- Loop B= Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
- Loop C= Jumper P1 on the first IDNet Loop cards
- Loop D= Jumper P1 on the second IDNet Loop card

page 148 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 103: Class

A Jumper Setting
2. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield to prevent it from coming in contact with other
components.
3. Route the wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device.
4. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out. See Figure 104. Repeat for each device.
5. Route the wiring from the last device to the panel.
6. Connect the wiring to the corresponding Secondary Terminals (A+, A-).

Devices
1 2 1 2 1 2
+

18 to 12 AWG

IDNet 2 Card

Figure 104: IDNet 2 Class A Wiring

Class A wiring notes:

1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start from the “B” side and assign each
successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds.

12.6.4 Class B Wiring

When wiring the loop for Class B circuits, both the B+, B- and A+, A- terminals are available for parallel connections. Within the IDNet 2 circuitry, A+ is
connected to B+, and A- is connected to B- so circuits can stem from either one. Additionally, two wires can be connected to each screw terminal.
To wire the Loop terminals as a Class B circuit:
1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “B” position, as shown in Figure 105.
- Loop 1 = Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card
- Loop 2 = Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
- Loop 3 = Jumper P1 on the left IDNet Loop card
- Loop 4 = Jumper P1 on the right IDNet Loop card

page 149 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

2. Route wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device. It is possible to add up to 4 circuits per IDNet
loop on the terminal block when using Class B wiring. See Figure 106 for the diagram.
3. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out as shown in Figure 106. Repeat for each device.

Figure 105: Class B Jumper Setting

Devices

1 Different Circuit Configurations

1
2 3

2
IDNet CIRCUIT A 4
B+, B- B+ B- A+ A-
Terminals

TB1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
2 Circuit Configuration 4 Circuit Configuration

Note: For Class B wiring only, up to 4 parallel wiring “T”

taps may be made at the output terminal blocks

Figure 106: IDNet 2 Class B Wiring

Class B wiring notes:

1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start at the output and assign each successive
isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds. For Class B wiring only, the “A” output and “B” output per loop are connected together
in parallel for wiring convenience.

page 150 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

13 PC Software Connections
The service port on the CPU daughter card allows the 4100ES panel to connect to a PC’s running important utilities, such as diagnostics, programming,
CPU firmware downloading, and channel monitoring.
The panel can also connect to a remote PC through the 4100-9832 Service Modem or through the Ethernet.

13.1 Software Modes

There are three basic software modes that the service port or service modem can be used to connect to:
• Service and Diagnostics Mode
• Data Transfer Interface Mode
• Master Bootloader Interface Mode
Each mode is described below.
Service and Diagnostics Mode:
This is the default functionality when a PC is connected to the FACP. On a PC, this mode provides application startup messages, an ASCII interface to a
UI command set for diagnostics, and event reporting. A pre-configured terminal emulator is part of the 4100ES software and can be launched from the
programmer. The connection to a PC is made either through the serial port, through the service modem, or through the Ethernet port.

Option 1 Option 2

serial download
cable

Modem
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) Laptop/PC running
terminal emulation software running application terminal emulation software

Figure 107: Service and Diagnostic Interface

Data Transfer Interface Mode:

In this mode, the ES Panel Programmer is enabled. This allows for slave downloading, as well as downloading a configuration and audio messages to
the FACP, and uploading a configuration or history log from the FACP. Connection to a PC is made through the serial port, through the service modem
or through the Ethernet port.

Option 1 Option 2

serial download
cable

Modem
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) Laptop/PC running
Programmer software running application Programmer software

Figure 108: Data Transfer Interface

Master Bootloader Interface Mode:

This interface should be used when the Master executable is not functioning. It downloads the Master CPU Exec firmware and the [Link] file to the
CPU using the serial port.

page 151 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

serial download
cable

Laptop/PCrunning
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel
terminal emulation
programming software
file transfer running Bootloader

Figure 109: Bootloader Interface

13.2 Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port

13.2.1 Ethernet Service Port Overview (0566-719 only)

The Ethernet service port J1 on the CPU card (0566-719) is used to connect the panel to a local PC. See Figure 110 for the port location.

SERVICE PORT (P5) DISPLAY PORT (P6)

(for a serial connection)

SERIAL NUMBER
CHIP
ETHERNET PORT
(J1) RJ45 TYPE
CONNECTOR TO CPU
MOTHERBOARD (P9)

Figure 110: CPU card ports

The Ethernet service port connects to the front panel Ethernet connection through a standard straight (non-crossover) Ethernet Patch Cable. The
service technician should connect his PC to the CPU card through this front panel connection with a standard straight Ethernet cable (see ). If this
connection is not available, you may plug directly into the CPU Card connector J1 to the PC with a standard straight Ethernet cable.

page 152 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Front Panel
Ethernet Service Port

Emergency Op

Figure 111: Front Panel Ethernet Service Port

13.2.2 Serial Service Port Overview

The Serial Service Port P5 on the CPU card (0566, 149, 0566-692 and 0566-719) can also be used to connect the Panel to a local PC. See Figure 110 for
the port location.
To use this port, the technician must connect the serial service port cable on the PC directly to the serial Service Port (P5) on the card.

page 153 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

14 MNS/ECS Application
This chapter covers the configuration of a 4100ES system to operate as a mass notification system (MNS).

14.1 Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System

14.1.1 General Information

A 4100ES system with Basic Voice option 4100-9620 (analog) or 4100-9621 (digital) can be configured for operation as a Mass Notification System
(MNS). Configuration of the system is to be done per UL2572, taking into account any special requirements resulting from a Risk Analysis.

14.1.2 Hierarchy of Operator Interfaces

The 4100ES main user interface serves as the primary local control unit for the in-building MNS, called the Autonomous Control Unit. It is an
“authorized personnel” operator interface, that can take control of the paging and messaging features of the 4100ES system.
The ACU serves as the primary control station in the MNS, and as such has the highest priority among all operator interfaces attached to the 4100ES
system, including network interfaces such as a TrueSite Workstation. The hierarchy of operation is specified by UL2572 as:
• Autonomous Control Unit (ACU)
• Local Control Unit (LOC)
• Central Command Station (CCS)
A Local Control Unit (LOC) is an in-building operator interface for authorized personnel to initiate messages and signaling in an emergency situation.
An example of an LOC is a 4100 Remote Annunciator, configured with remote microphone and LED/Switch modules for activation of the paging and
emergency message features of the 4100ES.
A Central Command Station (CCS) is a networked user interface, such as TrueSite Workstation. These units can activate signaling over a local in-building
or campus network. A CCS is provided with a microphone, which may be a remote microphone, such as 4003-9803 wired from a 4100ES fire alarm
node in the system. Another possibility would be a 4100-1244 remote microphone in a transponder bay installed into a console at the CCS location.
Alternately, a 4100ES may be rack-mounted as part of the command console, and the master microphone would be available for this function.
The hierarchy of the operator interfaces is programmed using Custom Control. For example, the ACU could have a switch programmed to be a priority
3, an LOC switch could be programmed as priority 4 and a CCS could have a switch programmed as priority 5. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s
Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming switch priority and writing custom control.
If transfer of control is required, LED/Switch points must be programmed to activate and to indicate the transfer of control to each desired location.
These switches would be programmed at different priorities and the LEDs would indicate the status of control.
Refer to document 900-249, 4100 Upgrade Audio Enhancement Guide for details on how to configure an audio system with multiple command centers.
When any unit is in control, an LED must indicate the active control at each location. If a higher priority service takes control from a lesser priority
service, that should be indicated by extinguishing the LED or indicator for the lesser priority service and lighting the LED or indicator for the greater
priority service.
For example, if the LOC takes control, the CCS must be locked out from taking control and an indicator at the CCS must show that the LOC is in control.
If the ACU then takes control from the LOC, the indication must change at both the LOC and CCS that the ACU now has control. In this case, both the
LOC and CCS must be locked from taking control.

14.1.3 Priority of Signals

A Mass Notification System is often a combination of fire alarm and other signals. As such, it may receive signals that affect life safety that are other
than fire alarm signals. Any signal that indicates a danger to Life Safety, including fire alarm, is the highest priority. The highest priority could also
include intruder alert, tornado warning, or other signals as determined by the Risk Analysis.
If multiple signals are received simultaneously, the priority of signals is:
1. Signals associated with life safety
2. Signals associated with property safety
3. Supervisory signals and trouble signals associated with life and/or property safety
4. All other signals
In the 4100ES system, signal priority can be selected by assignment of point type and further by custom control. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s
Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming input point priority and writing custom control.

14.1.4 Overriding Fire Alarm Signals

An MNS/ECS system must have the capability to override any other notification signals. When the 4100ES is used as a combination fire alarm/MNS,
the system programming determines which signal has priority. Just as an Evacuation Message has higher priority than an Alert Message, system
programming gives priority to MNS functions over other alarm functions.
In the event that a fire alarm signal is overridden by the MNS signal, and the MNS signal is then “silenced”, the building occupants need to be assured
that the evacuation system is still functioning.

page 154 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

During the period the mass notification system has seized control of audible and/or visible notification appliances of a fire alarm, but before the mass
notification relinquishes control, an audible and visible signal shall be actuated by the notification appliances at least once every thirty seconds, unless
there is an active signal present, to be recognized by the usual building occupants.
With a 4100ES system, use Custom Control equations. A single flash and a short beep of audible and visible appliances meets this requirement.
Alternately, an appropriate prerecorded message may be played. For example, a message instructing occupants to “shelter in place” may be played
after a live microphone message. Risk Analysis by the AHJ should guide the appropriate pre-recorded messages. Switches for activation of special
messages should be marked so as to be identifiable during an emergency by trained personnel.
Custom Control equations for the “chirp/flash” of audible and visible appliances are suggested below.

14.1.5 Timing Equations

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P711 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAS PAGING - MASS PAGING HAS PRIORITY
CYCLE CONSTANT 3 25
A272 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END OUTPUTS]

14.1.6 Appliance Control Equations

[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9 SIG903 | SIGB | RVISUAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 4 - ALL VISUAL DEVICES TRACK ON PRI=9,9
SIG901 | SIGB | SSIGNAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 2 - ALL AUDIBLE DEVICES
UPLAYQ CHL4=4 VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=L260 TRK=NONE
PRI=9,9
PRINT PANEL "MASS NOTIFICATION ACTIVE"
USILENCE CHL4 PRI=9,9
[END OUTPUTS]

14.1.7 Public Accessible Panic Switches

Some applications call for panic switches that are accessible to the public. Panic switches are input devices used to signal a non-fire emergency,
and could be used to trigger events and/or announcements in the building. If these switches are installed in public areas of a building they would
typically not automatically trigger a Mass Notification event. Instead, they would trigger the Command Center to investigate the signal and make the
appropriate announcement.
A variety of devices can be connected to a Simplex 4100ES via an individual addressable module (IAM). The IAM should be programmed as a priority 2
device, or other non-fire alarm point. The IAM may be used to monitor any contact type initiating device. Use a contact-type initiating device listed
to ANSI/UL 2017.
The Command Center may also use security cameras and/or intercom capabilities to allow them to make a more rapid response and a Mass
Notification announcement if necessary.

14.2 Programming and Configuration

14.2.1 Programming the 4100ES to Meet MNS Requirements

The programming for an MNS is not special; it can be accomplished using priority, modes, and Custom Control. Any technician who has attended
training and become a certified 4100ES Fire Alarm Technician should be capable of programming the 4100ES for MNS combined with Fire Alarm
service.
Program a key for the reset of MNS panic switch alarms. The key mode should be type “PBT”, with the reference address of P216. The adjacent LED
should be programmed to track the status of the reset window timer, illuminating for the duration of the reset cycle. The reset window timer is A214.
MNS requires that dedicated LEDs be programmed for any MNS-specific service. It is appropriate to use Priority 2 for MNS alarms. Pri 2 could also be
used to indicate another alarm, such as CO. In a case of multiple Pri 2 alarms, LEDs must be added for each type of service. Program these LEDs to
track the state of the points involved in that service.

page 155 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 112: Supervisory and

Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire

MNS can also have Supervisory inputs, which should still be programmed as Supervisory in order to activate the sounder and the Supervisory
indicator. A dedicated LED for each type of service must also be programmed. For example, a fire supervisory would light a dedicated fire supervisory
LED, as well as the general supervisory LED. An MNS supervisory would light a dedicated MNS supervisory LED as well as the general supervisory LED.
This is to comply with a UL2572 requirement for an indication of each type of service without activating any controls.
The same requirement holds when there are MNS specific points. They should light the general trouble LED and sound the piezo. They should also be
programmed such that an LED tracks the trouble status of MNS points and a separate LED tracks the trouble status of fire alarm points.

14.2.2 Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU

The minimum configuration for LOC and ACU is listed below.

Table 34: Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU

• MNS Reset
• MNS Alarm activation
Controls
• MNS Take Command/Relinquish Command
• CO Reset
• MNS Supervisory LED
• MNS Trouble LED
• CO Alarm LED
Indicators
• ACU in Control LED
• CCS in Control LED
• LOC in Control LED

14.2.3 Access and Security Information for the 4100ES System

Communications Security: Level 1
Stored Data Security: Level 0
Physical Security: Level 1
Access Control: Level 1

14.2.4 Voice Control Centers

The primary solution for controlling and activating voice messages on a Simplex fire alarm network is utilizing the standard 4100ES LED and Switch
user interface along with a microphone for live voice announcements.
In the example below the operator first selects the destination for a message on the left and then selects the audio source or pre-recorded message
to play on the right.

page 156 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 113: Voice Message Configuration Example

In a system with multiple voice command centers a take control button with an in-control indicator would also be appropriate to configure on your
annunciator with microphone.
The 4100ES and 4120 network support a variety of programmable options for utilizing prioritization and request/cancel procedures for taking control
of the system. This feature prevents operators from interfering with each other in a system with multiple command centers.
In some cases different colored peripherals or boxes are specified for Mass Notification. Contact sales engineering for information on meeting these
requirements.

14.2.5 Configuration Limitations

A 4100ES is not UL Listed for Background Music/General Paging or Security when configured for MNS, because the UL testing did not include these
services in the test scope.

Note: The TrueSite Workstation is not listed for UL 2017 operation. The TSW functionality must be limited to remote annunciator active when used for
MNS operations.

14.2.6 Amber Strobes

The 4100ES is compatible with the amber strobes listed below:
• 4906-9205, 4906-9206, 4906-9207 (addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9107, 4906-9108 (non-addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9208, 4906-9211 (visible only, with both an amber and a clear lens strobe, respectively marked “ALERT” and “FIRE”)
Other models of Simplex brand strobes are available with “ALERT” instead of “FIRE”. Refer to the installation instructions for each power supply for
complete lists of compatible appliances.

14.2.7 MNS Wiring

The 4100ES field wiring is “power-limited”, with the exception of AC input, battery and the City Circuit option module wiring. For MNS, the term “power
limited” has been replaced by the NEC term “class 2”. Wherever this document uses the UL864 term “power limited”, it can be taken to mean class 2.
Any wiring deemed “power limited” for UL864 is deemed “class 2” for MNS.

page 157 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

15 Appendix A: The Device Configuration DIP Switch

Addressable cards include a bank of eight DIP switches. From left to right (see Figure 114) these switches are designated as SWx-1 through SWx-8. The
function of these switches is as follows:
• SWx-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the CPU. Set this switch to ON.
• SWx-2 through SWx-8. These switches set the card’s address within the 4100 FACP. Refer to Figure 115 for a complete list of the switch settings for
all of the possible card addresses.

Note: You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the ES Panel Programmer.

DIP Switches SWx-2 through

4100 Comm. Baud Rate. SWx-8 set the Card Address.
Switch (SWx-1) Figure shows an Address of 3.
Must Be Set to ON

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 114: DIP Switch SWx

page 158 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

15.1 The Service Port

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Figure 115: Card Addresses

page 159 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

16 Appendix B: Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)

MINIPLEX remote interface cards (RICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter
describes the transponder installation procedure for all MINIPLEX systems in non-4100ES/4100U systems.

16.1 Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems

The 4100 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm System uses transponder cabinets containing remote interface cards (RICs) to extend power and communication across
large areas. MINIPLEX transponders allow the system to provide applications for up to 1000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator
points (see note). Using 4100-style serial communications, up to 31 distributed MINIPLEX transponder locations are possible for initiating device circuit
cards, MAPNET II/ TrueAlarm addressable communications interfaces, notification appliance circuit cards, LED/switch controls, auxiliary relay control
cards, power supplies, and audio amplifiers.
By selecting the required combinations of modules and mounting MINIPLEX transponders at the appropriate building locations, wire quantities are
significantly reduced for all monitor and control functions. Since power for the local modules is provided from the local power supply, the wiring from
the control panel need only be separate twisted, shielded pairs for data, voice, and telephone.

Note:
• One point consists of one LED or one switch on an LED/switch module, one LED driver output on a graphic driver, or one switch input on a
graphic switch input module.
• Up to 32 modules can be controlled by one MINIPLEX transponder.
• The 4100 0117 MINIPLEX Expansion Power Supply is available with a power-limited 8 A output.
Figure 116 is an outline of a MINIPLEX system.

page 160 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Seventh floor

MINIPLEX transponder
with solid door

Legend:
Sixth floor

Speaker NAC

TrueAlarm sensors
and MAPNET II
Fifth floor addressable circuits

Audio riser wiring,

twisted pair
RUI communications
wiring, twisted,
Fourth floor shielded pair

MINIPLEX transponder with

LED/switch modules on door panel

Third floor

ACKNOWLEDGE

Second floor

FACP
First floor

Figure 116: MINIPLEX System Design

16.2 MINIPLEX System Components

The 4100 MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a standalone cabinet (see Chapter Installing 4100ES
MINIPLEX Components), plus:
• An RUI module in the master controller bay
• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A RIC II card in each transponder cabinet
This section describes each component in turn.

16.2.1 The RUI Card

The RUI module consists of a motherboard and daughter card, which are used in the master controller bay of a MINIPLEX system to extend the length
of communications wire to reach remote bays.
Figure 117 is an illustration of the RUI card.

page 161 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 117: The Remote Unit Interface Card

The RUI card mounts onto a 562-799 or 562-856 Motherboard.

16.2.2 Transponder Cabinets

Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to the RIC II card in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is
simply a 2975-91xx Back Box with a RIC II module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

16.2.3 The Remote Interface Card (RIC)

Remote interface cards (RICs) in the transponder cabinets allow for data, power, and audio interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote
locations. They support RUI connections in Style 4 and Class X (Style 7) wiring configurations.

Figure 118 illustrates the RIC circuit board.

TB2 LED1 COMMS TROUBLE LED 8

PIEZO/MICROPHONE TBL
(LED 1): POWER/COMM +COMM
PRIM
PIEZO

TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2) CTRL

LED Lights if there is a line short TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) +COMM
PRIM
SEC
-COMM
CTRL
PTT+
on either primary or -COMM

PTT- secondary lines, or if both HEADER CONNECTOR +24 V

+COMM
REMOTE MICROPHONE comms inputs are absent. +24 V
CONNECTOR (P1)
SHLD
(J1) +COMM
MIC

GRN 24C
WHT
24C

Figure 118: The RIC II Card

16.3 MINIPLEX System Guidelines

The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100 system.

16.3.1 Guidelines
• The MINIPLEX master control panel must be a 4100-8210 Voice and Sound Control Panel.

page 162 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100 Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different
wiring requirements (such as using a Class X (Style 7) RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 MINIPLEX transponders can be controlled from the 4100 Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• “T” tapping is allowed for Style 4 communications only (Class X (Style 7) wiring does not support “T” tapping).
• *Wiring from RUI cards is a minimum of 18 AWG twisted, shielded pair.
• The maximum wiring distance from the 4100 RUI card to a MINIPLEX transponder is 2500 feet (762 m). For Style 4 wiring, this can be extended to
10,000 feet (3 km) maximum if “T” tapping is used.
• Voice and telephone wiring for 4100-8210 systems is via separate twisted, shielded pairs.
• 4100U system cards are not compatible with 4100 miniplex transponders that are controlled by a 4100 RIC II card.
*The RUI+ has the same limitation as the RUI, except shielded wire is not required.

16.4 Installing Modules into Back Boxes

This section contains guidelines and instructions for mounting the RUI and RIC II modules into 4100 back boxes.
• The RUI motherboard mounts into the CPU bay or, if necessary, an expansion bay.
• The RIC II mounts into expansion bays only.

16.4.1 Guidelines
Review the following guidelines before installing a motherboard into a cabinet.
• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots
immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically
120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.

16.4.2 Installing the RUI Motherboard

Mount the RUI motherboard (562-799 or 562-856) in a master controller bay as described below.
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the motherboard you are installing. Slide the motherboard
to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost
board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

page 163 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 119: Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay

Note: RUI motherboards may also be installed in expansion bays.

16.4.3 Installing the RIC II Motherboard

The RIC II motherboard is installed into a remote transponder cabinet (back box PID series 2975-91xx). Review the following guidelines before
mounting RIC II motherboard.
• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots
immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically
120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these
modules contains the J1 or P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.
Use the following directions and Figure 120 to install a RIC II motherboard into a transponder cabinet.
1. The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right.
2. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

page 164 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the

leftmost slot.

J1

RIC II

Figure 120: Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay
3. If you are installing the RIC II in a transponder cabinet with additional bays, you must connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness.
Continue to the next topic for instructions.

16.4.4 Connecting the 733-525 Harness

If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure 121 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and
communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.
If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the master controller motherboard and
continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a
4100-0155/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100-0153/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the
second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness
connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness
connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the
left side of the bay.
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness
connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness
connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

page 165 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

TO 24 VDC

RIC II
(565-233)

Connector with
Blue Wire Goes
to P2 (OPTIONAL)
UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY
Connector with
White Wire Goes
to P3

733-672 Harness
733-525 Harness

Figure 121: Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100)

16.5 MINIPLEX Wiring

The RIC must be connected to the host panel via RUI cabling. This section explains how to wire the two together, and how to set up a system with
multiple transponders connected to the same host panel.

16.5.1 Wiring Configurations

RUI cabling can be accomplished either through Class A or Class B wiring.
Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of an open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring
requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each RIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require
end-of-line resistors, because each RIC communicates directly to the CPU.

Important: Make sure these prerequisites are accounted for before wiring:

page 166 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• All transponder cabinets are installed within 2500 feet (762 m) of the FACP.
• Conductors test free of all grounds.
• All wires are between 12 and 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.

16.5.2 Class A Wiring

To connect the RUI card to RICs using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 122, on the next page.
1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to
the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within 2500 feet (762 m).
3. Route wire from TB1-7 (+) and TB1-5 (-) on the last RIC to + (TB1-4) and - (TB1-2) on the COMMS “B” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card.

16.5.3 Class B Wiring

To connect the RUI card to RIC II cards using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 122, on the next page.
1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to
the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within 2500 feet (762 m).

page 167 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

16.5.4 Wiring Illustration

Figure 122 illustrates Class A and Class B wiring.

4100 MINIPLEX MASTER

562-856 W/565-217
RUI +24 V
COMMS "A" COMMS "B" 24 C
T
B
1 T T
B 8 1
B 8 1
1 1
RIC 11
II RIC 11
II
565-233 565-233
See
Note 1

MINIPLEX MINIPLEX
TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER
CLASS B CLASS A

Figure 122: MINIPLEX Wiring

Note:
1. Power wiring is not shown. Connect the RIC II card to the UPS or expansion power supply in the transponder cabinet.
2. If a UPS is not provided in the transponder cabinet, then 24 VDC must be provided from the host panel.
3. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.
4. All wiring is supervised and power limited.

page 168 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

17 Appendix C: Checking System Wiring

This appendix contains instructions on how to use a volt/ohm meter to check system wiring.

17.1 Using the Volt/ Ohm Meter

When using the volt/ohm meter to check each circuit, make sure to adhere to the notes and instructions below.

Note:
• Ensure that no power is applied to the 4100 fire alarm panel and that all wiring is properly connected (terminal blocks, LED/switch module ribbon
cables, etc.).
• Use the green grounding lug in the control panel for all measurements to ground.
• Each circuit must test free of all grounds and extraneous (stray) voltages.
• If there are problems removing all power from the fire alarm system, there is an alternate method of testing for stray voltage. The wires may be
lifted from the panel and terminated with appropriate resistors. Use 3.3 Kohms across conductor pairs and 50 Kohms from any conductor under
test to ground. All conductors must read less than 1.0V AC or DC.

Use the volt/ohm meter as described in the steps below to check each circuit type.
1. At the control panel, locate wires from each initiating device or indicating appliance circuit.
2. Check each circuit for extraneous voltage by setting the volt/ohm meter to AC. Place the meter probes so that the black probe is on the “-”
wire and the red probe is on the “+” wire. Meter readings must show less than 1.0 VAC.
3. Set the volt/ohm meter to DC and repeat step 2. The meter must read less than 1.0 VDC.
4. Test all conductors for voltage to ground. The meter must read no more than 1.0V AC or DC.
5. Set the volt/ohm meter to OHMS and place the meter probes as described in step 2. Check the circuits using the resistance measurements
in Table Table 35. Locate and correct any abnormal conditions at this time.
Note: If the reading indicates an open circuit in an initiating circuit, make sure the smoke detector heads are properly mounted and seated.
The circuit may be open if smoke detector power is not present, and if separately powered 4-wire devices are used.
6. Check all other system wiring to verify that each circuit is free of grounds and extraneous voltages.

17.2 Checking System Wiring

17.2.1 Meter Readings

Table 35 lists the correct meter readings for indicating appliances and initiating devices.

Table 35: Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings

Circuit Type Meter Reading

Class B/Style B Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone) 3.3 K Ohms
From zone + to ground Infinity
From zone - to ground Infinity
Class A/Style D Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone) Infinity
From zone + to ground Infinity
From zone - to ground Infinity
From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 25 Ohms
From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 25 Ohms
Class B/Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
From + to ground Infinity
From - to ground Infinity
Resistance across circuit:
10 K Ohms
In one direction
Less than 200 Ohms
In opposite direction
Class A/Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
From + to ground Infinity
From - to ground Infinity
From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 50 Ohms

page 169 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 35: Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings

Circuit Type Meter Reading

From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 50 Ohms
Resistance across circuit:
Infinity
In one direction
Less than 200 Ohms
In opposite direction
Shielding
Shield to ground Infinity
Shield to - Infinity
Shield to + Infinity
MAPNET II Loops (ZAMs and IAMs)
From MAPNET II + to ground Infinity
From MAPNET II - to ground Infinity

page 170 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

18 Appendix D: References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-0156 8V DC CONVERTER 574-123
4100-0620 TRANSPONDER IF MODULE 574-848
4100-0621 ANALOG AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848
4100-0622 DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848
4100-0623 NETWORK AUDIO I/F MODULE 574-848
4100-0625 LOCAL MODE TPR IF 574-848
4100-0632 UTILITY BLOC, 16 TERMINALS 579-248
4100-0633 TRANSPONDER TAMPER SWITCH 579-195
4100-0634 POWER DIST MODULE 120V 574-848
4100-0635 POWER DIST MODULE 220V 574-848
4100-1210 ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER 579-159
4100-1240 AUX AUDIO INPUT MODULE 579-160
4100-1241 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 8 MINUTES 579-172
4100-1242 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 32 MINUTES 579-172
4100-1245 FLEX 50 NAC EXPANSION, 3 CLS B 579-175
4100-1246 FLEX 50 CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175
4100-1248 100W NAC EXPANSION, 6 CLASS B 579-175
4100-1249 100W CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175
4100-1252 AUDIO IF MODULE, SGL CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1253 AUDIO IF MODULE MULTI-CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1254 AUDIO IF 2 CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1255 AUDIO IF 3-8 CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B 579-515
CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B -
4100-1259 579-515
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B 579-515
CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B -
4100-1260 579-515
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1265 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE MASTER 579-571
4100-1266 EXPANSION NAC CARD FOR EXP SIG 579-175
4100-1267 EXP SIG CARD CLASS A 579-175
4100-1268 EXP SIGCARD CONSTANT SUPV 579-515
4100-1269 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE SLAVE 579-571
4100-1270 MASTER TELEPHONE, 3 NACS 579-226
4100-1271 REMOTE MASTER PHONE 579-226
4100-1272 EXPANSION PHONE CONTROLLER 579-226
4100-1273 PHONE CLASS A NAC ADAPTER 579-226
4100-1274 MICROPHONE MUX MODULE 579-879
4100-1276 8 RED PLUGGABLE LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1277 16 RED/YEL PLUGGABLE LED MOD 574-843
4100-1278 16 SW/16 RED/YEL PLUG LED 574-843
4100-1279 2” BLANK DISPLAY MODULE 574-843
4100-1280 8 SWITCH, 8 RED LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1281 8 SWITCH, 8 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1282 8 SW, 16RED/YEL LED MOUDLE 574-843
4100-1283 8 SWITCH, 16 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1284 8 SW, 16 RED/GREEN LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1285 16 SWITCH, 16 RED LED MODULE 574-843

page 171 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-1286 HOA MODULE 24SWI/24RED LED 574-843
4100-1287 24 SWITCH, 24 RED LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1288 64/64 LED/SWITCH CONTROLLER 574-843
4100-1289 EXPANSION 64/64 LED/SW MODULE 574-843
4100-1290 24 POINT I/O MODULE 579-183
4100-1291 REMOTE UNIT INTERFACE (RUI) 579-213
4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR 579-997
4100-1293 PANEL MOUNT PRINTER 579-249
4100-1295 HOA MODULE,NO TEXT,24SW/24LED 574-843
4100-1296 8 SW, 16 GREEN/ YELLOW LED MOD. 574-843
4100-1297 TFX PHONE CARD 579-862
4100-1298 4100U/4100ES MASTER FIREFIGHTER PHONE ASSEMBLY w/TFX Phone Card 579-862
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-173
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-174
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-173
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-174
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1326 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-173
4100-1327 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173
4100-1328 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1329 DIG. 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1330 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC, 25V-C 579-174
4100-1331 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V-C 579-174
4100-1332 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1333 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1334 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V 579-174

page 172 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-1335 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1336 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V-C 579-174
4100-1337 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V-C 579-174
4100-1338 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1339 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1340 4100U/4100ES TFX AUDIO INTERFACE MODULE 579-815
4100-1361 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-173
4100-1341 Multiple Command Center Digital Audio Riser module 574-844
4100-1362 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173
4100-1363 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-25V 579-173
4100-1364 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-70V 579-173
IDNET MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS- Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current) 4100-3101 with full channel -
4100-3101 574-800
250 IDNet devices
MAPNET MODULE, UP TO 127 PTS
4100-3102 579-222
Each MAPNET Device (Add to MAPNET current) 4100-3102 with full channel - 127 MAPNET devices
4100-3103 MAPNET/IDNET ISOLATOR MODULE 579-514
4100-3104 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 127 POINTS 574-800
4100-3105 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 64 POINTS 574-800
4100-3106 IDNET MODULE QUICK CONNECT 2 574-800
IDNET+ MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS
4100-3107 579-786
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
4100-3108 IDNet1+ MODULE 579-1014
4100-3109 IDNET 2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Two Isolated Loops per IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current) 579-1169
4100-3110 IDNET 2+2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Four Isolated Loops per IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current) 579-1169
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Master) 579-513
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Slave) 579-513
4100-3202 4 RELAYS, 10 AMP CONTACTS 579-220
4100-3204 4 POINT 2 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-220
4100-3206 8 POINT 3 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-220
4100-5005 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS B 579-205
4100-5015 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS A 579-205
4100-5101 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-772
4100-5102 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-772
4100-5103 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADA 574-772
X SPS PWR, IDNET, 3 NACS, 120V
4100-5111 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)
SPS POWER,3 NACS,120VAC CAN
4100-5112 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)
SPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220/240V
4100-5113 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
4100-5115 XPS EXPANSION MODULE, 3 NACS 574-772
4100-5116 EXPANSION AUDIO SIGNAL CARD 579-516
4100-5120 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 120VAC 579-336
4100-5121 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS,CAN 579-336
4100-5122 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 240VAC 579-336
4100-5124 TPS CLASS A ADAPTER MOD 579-337
4100-5125 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-246
4100-5126 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADIAN 574-246
4100-5127 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-246
4100-5128 BATTERY DIST TERM MODULE 579-332
4100-5130 4100U/4100ES TFX Voltage Regulator Module 579-812

page 173 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-5152 POWER MODULE, 2A, 12 VOLTS 579-218
4100-5311 EPS POWER, 120V with IDNet 2 Card 579-1015
4100-5313 EPS POWER, 240V with IDNet 2 Card 579-1015
4100-5325 EPS POWER, 120V 579-1015
4100-5327 EPS POWER, 240V 579-1015
4100-6014 NETWORK IFC CARD, MODULAR 579-182
4100-6029 SMOKE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION GUIDE 574-465
4100-6030 SERVICE MODEM (566-276) 579-194
4100-6031 CITY MODULE W/DISCONNECT 574-839
4100-6032 CITY MODULE W/O DISCONNECT 574-839
4100-6033 ALARM RELAY 574-839
4100-6034 TAMPER SWITCH W/IDNET IAM 574-195
4100-6036 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 4 579-184
4100-6037 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 7 579-184
4100-6038 DUAL RS-232 IF CARD 579-221
4100-6045 DECODER MODULE 574-037
4100-6047 BUILDING NETWORK INTERFACE CARD 579-949
4100-6048 VESDA INTERFACE KIT 574-050
4100-6052 EVENT REPORTING DACT 574-836
4100-6055 DIAL-IN SERVICE MODEM (566-338) 574-046
4100-6056 NETWORK MEDIA CARD WIRED 579-182
4100-6057 NETWORK MEDIA CARD F/OPTIC 579-182
4100-6060 SAFELINC FP INTERNET INTERFACE 579-349
4100-6061 MODULAR NIC, REDUNDANT 579-331
4100-6062 TFX NETWORK INTERFACE 579-575
4100-6063 FIBER OPTIC MODEM LEFT PORT 579-581
4100-6064 FIBER OPTIC MODEM RIGHT PORT 579-581
4100-6066 4100U/4100ES TFX Addressable Loop Interface Card 579-811
4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet 579-842
4100-6080 DACT SIDE MOUNTED 574-836
579-182
4100-6301 4120 SM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card
/579-1238
579-182
4100-6302 4120 SM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card
/579-1238
579-182
4100-6303 4120 MM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card
/579-1238
579-182
4100-6304 4120 MM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card
/579-1238
4100-6104 ES Net Network Interface Card 579-1256
4100-6306 ES Net Dual Channel Ethernet Media Card 579-1258
4100-6307 ES Net Dual Channel DSL Media Card 579-1258
4100-6308 ES Net Dual Channel Single-mode Fiber Media Card 579-1258
4100-6309 ES Net Dual Channel Multi-mode Fiber Media Card 579-1258
4100-6310 ES Net Network Interface Card - Flat 579-1257
4100-7150 MASTER UPGRADE, 2X40 LCD 579-229
4100-7151 MASTER UPGRADE, NO DISPLAY 574-918
4100-7152 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE, W/ DSPLY 579-229
4100-7153 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229
4100-7154 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229
4100-7155 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229
4100-7156 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229

page 174 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher) 579-943
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829
4100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices 574-848
4100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9112 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9113 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9114 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9115 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9116 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9121 4100U/4100ES [Link] 120V 579-331
4100-9122 4100U/4100ES Preconfig. w/ Flexible User Interface REDUNDANT 120V 579-331
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY 574-848
4100-9132 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY 574-848
4100-9133 MSTR CANADIAN FRENCH w/o UI 574-918
4100-9141 NETWORK DISPLAY UNIT, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9142 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9143 NDU CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9144 NDU CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9145 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9146 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9151 NDU W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9152 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9153 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9154 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9155 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9156 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9157 ES Net NDU - DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9158 ES Net NDU W/VOICE - DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9159 ES Net NDU CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9160 ES Net NDU CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9161 ES Net NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9162 ES Net NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9163 ES Net NDU W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9164 ES Net NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9165 ES Net NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9168 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9169 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9170 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9248 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9249 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (120V) 579-269
4100-9250 ES Net NDU INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9251 ES Net NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9252 ES Net NDU W/Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9253 ES Net NDU w/ Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (120V) 579-269
4100-9357 ES Net NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC, EPS 579-269
4100-9358 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, EPS - DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9359 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, EPS CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9545 ES Net NDU W/VOICE and EPS - INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9211 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (230V) 574-848
4100-9212 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (230V) 574-848
4100-9214 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface, CHINA (230V) 574-848

page 175 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4100-9213 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V) 574-848
4100-9222 Redundant Mstr w/ Flexible User Interface International (230V) 579-269
4100-9230 MSTR INTERNATIONAL NO DISPLAY (230V) 574-848
4100-9241 NDU INTERNATIONAL 579-269
4100-9242 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL 579-269
4100-9243 NDU W/Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9244 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9245 NDU w/ Flexible User Interface International (120V) 579-269
4100-9246 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9311 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9312 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9313 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9314 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9315 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9316 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9332 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9342 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9352 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9355 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9401 Remote Display Assembly w/ Flexible User Interface, RED, DOMESTIC 579-687
4100-9402 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, DOMESTIC 579-687
4100-9421 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687
4100-9422 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687
4100-9441 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, INTERNATIONAL 579-687
4100-9442 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, INTERNATIONAL 579-687
4100-9511 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (220,230, 240V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9512 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (220,230, 240V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9513 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9531 MASTER CONTROLLER 1 LOOP– 220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9532 MASTER CONTROLLER 2 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9533 MASTER CONTROLLER 3 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9534 MASTER CONTROLLER 5 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9542 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9600 BASIC TRANSPONDER 574-844
4100-9601 LOCAL MODE TRANSPONDER 574-844
4100-9607 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9608 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9609 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9610 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR 579-271
4100-9611 REMOTE ANNUN EXTERNAL POWER 579-271
4100-9612 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9613 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9614 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9620 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-ANALOG 748-589
4100-9621 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-DIGITAL 748-589
4100-9816 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE KIT 574-913
4100-9832 SERVICE MODEM MODULE (566-276) 574-046
4100-9833 4020 RETRO-FIT KIT 579-229
4100-9854 4100 Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit 579-913
4190-9018 FIBER MODEM AUDIO Exp BOARD 579-581

page 176 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Installation
PID Description
Instructions
4905-9835 Temporal Code 4 Module 579-840
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829
Note:
1. The current for all LED and Switch modules is included with the current for 4100-1288 and 4100-1289 .
2. Amplifier standby current has two settings. The .085 A number is used if the System Option for "Audio Power Conservation" is selected. This option
shuts down the power stage when operating on secondary power (battery standby).
3. Add .8 mA (standby) / 1 mA (alarm) per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3101, 4100-3104, 4100-3105, 4100-3106 or
4100-3107 module.
4. Add 1.7 mA per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3102 MAPNET module.

page 177 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

19 Appendix E: Labels

GRAPHIC I/O (ASSY

562-789) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32 POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS B

(ASSY 562-731) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS A

(ASSY 562-813) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS A
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

MAPNET CHANNEL CLASS

A OR B LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-727
MOTHERBOARD AND
565-158 DAUGHTER CARD

MAPNET TRANSCEIVER (ASSY

562-926) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-974
MAPNET POWER SUPPLY

RS-232/2120 INTERFACE BOARD

(ASSY 565-004) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856) OR
TBI MOTHERBOARD (565-161
OR 565-213)

3 A AUX RELAY (ASSY

565-045) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
2 A AUX RELAY (ASSY
562-760) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

10 A AUX RELAY (ASSY

562-951) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO ASSY 562-952

page 178 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

AUDIO NAC LABELS

PHONE LABELS

FLEX 50 LABELS

SPS/RPS LABELS

XNAC LABELS

XPS LABELS

100 W
AMP
LABELS

page 179 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

20 Appendix F: Earth Fault Diagnostics

This appendix contains instructions on how to use the Earth Fault Search feature of the 4100ES diagnostics menus. The minimum Earth Fault
detection level for the 4100ES is 10k ohms for all circuits.
Earth Fault Search is a diagnostic search of external field wiring that assists in locating circuits with earth faults. An earth fault occurs when an electrical
circuit is shorted to ground. Although most circuits operate with a single earth fault, multiple earth faults can disable communications. Because of this,
earth faults must be located and repaired.
Earth Fault Search is conducted by the FACP. The diagnostic may be activated using either the front panel interface or the Computer Port Protocol
(CPP), using a service port.
The 4100ES supports two types of Earth Fault Searches:
• Location Search. Searches all circuits at a location, such as a transponder or the main panel. For the purposes of Earth Fault Searching,
- A location is composed of a group of slaves connected to each other via 4100 Comm (local RUI).
- The main panel is defined as all slaves local to the Master CPU.
- A transponder denotes all slaves associated with a single Transponder Interface Card (TIC)/Local Mode TIC slave.
• IDNet Channel Search. Selectively enables channel isolators and repeaters to detect which segment of the channel wiring has a fault.
- Earth faults are detected by one of the following:
- A single designated power supply at a location. The power supply that detects the fault is designated via a jumper setting on the power supply
slave. For any given location, only one power supply should detect earth faults.
- Each 4009 IDNet NAC Extender on an IDNet channel.

20.1 General Guidelines

Review the guidelines below before initiating an Earth Fault Search.
• The Detect Earth Fault jumper must be installed at each SPS, RPS, TPS, IPS, or 4009T for earth fault detection to occur.
• Only one power supply per location is configured to detect earth faults.
• For more reliable earth fault searching:
- Use a Firefighter Telephone NAC for each telephone riser connection to a transponder.
- Use IDNet channel isolators to isolate channel faults to a specific segment of channel wiring.
- Set IDNet channel isolator addresses to the lowest IDNet device addresses, increasing with communication distance from the IDNet card.
• If an earth fault is suspected on the IDNet channel with multiple isolators, start an IDNet Channel Search before doing a Location Search. If the
Location Search is done first, it may not yield the correct location (this is a by-product of the extended amount of time required for the IDNet
channel to initialize during a Location Search). Note: The 4009 IDNet NAC Extender has a common ground fault trouble that reports to the panel
without running the Earth Fault Search.
• Earth Fault Search detects only one fault at a time. Multiple faults require fixing the first fault and then repeating the search.
• The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the Earth Fault Search.
• Location Earth Fault Searches optionally allow exclusion of auxiliary power circuits from the search, so that modules connected to the 24 V
auxiliary outputs can remain in operation during the search.
• The option to exclude auxiliary power circuits does not apply to IDNet devices, because the entire IDNet communication channel is isolated during
each search.
• During the search, all related troubles are suppressed and a single trouble pseudo-point is activated (P438).
• At the completion of the search, all slaves are restarted and normal panel operation resumes.
• Earth Fault Search is only supported by new 4100ES modules. 4100 Legacy (slot format) modules are not supported, with the following
exceptions:
- MAPNET channel isolation during location search
- IPS for earth fault detection (not recommended). The Earth Fault Search may fail because the isolation circuits of some 4100ES slaves (such as
the 4100ES telephone slave) do not support IPS.
Important: The fire panel cannot provide fire protection during an Earth Fault Search.

page 180 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

20.2 Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel

This section describes how to conduct an Earth Fault Search, from selecting the appropriate access code to correcting the fault.

20.2.1 Access Level Selection

The panel must be at the appropriate access level (1, 2, 3, or 4) in order to run diagnostics. To get to the correct access level,
1. Press the Menu button. The following message comes up (press the Next or Previous buttons, if necessary, to display it):

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Change Access Level?

2. Press the Enter button. Now you are prompted to log in or log out.

1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = x
3. Press the "1" key on the numeric keypad to log in, so that the passcode prompt comes up.

Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER>

4. Enter the passcode and press the Enter button. ACCESS GRANTED displays briefly on the LCD, and then the display goes back to:

1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = y
You can now open the diagnostic menu as described in the next topic.

20.2.2 Starting the Earth Fault Search

To start an Earth Fault Search,
1. If necessary, press the Menu button to access the menus.
2. Press the Previous or Next buttons until the diagnostic functions option appears:

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll

Diagnostic Functions?
3. Press the Enter button. Then press Next or Previous buttons until the Earth Fault Search option appears:

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll

Earth Fault Search?
4. Press the Enter button. The following options become available when you press the Next and Previous buttons:

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll

Location Search
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
IDNet Channel Search
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Last Search Result
The search types are described below. When you have determined what kind of search to initiate, display its option (one of the three shown
above) and press the Enter button. Each option has its own topic, below.

20.2.3 Search Option A: Select Location

• If you select the Location Search menu item, a list of cards to search becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the
list.
• If you find a card that you suspect is connected to a circuit with an earth ground, press the Enter button when that circuit is shown.
• Before you can start the search, the Aux Power Select option comes up.

1=Exclude 2=Include
Exclude AUXPWR circuits from search?
• The number you select, 1 or 2, determines whether the auxiliary power circuit on the selected board is searched for earth grounds. If you exclude
the auxiliary power circuit from the search, the circuit will continue to operate normally.

page 181 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

• Press 1 (or just press the Enter button) to exclude the card's auxiliary power circuits from the search, or press 2 to remove auxiliary power circuits
from normal operation and search them for earth grounds.
• Now you are prompted to start the search. When the location you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the
search is ready to start. A sample is shown below.

CARD 1, SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY

Press <ENTER> to start search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.

• Press the Enter button to start the search.

• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any
time if you press the Clear button.

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

40%
Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

20.2.4 Search Option B: Select Channel

If you select the IDNet Channel Search menu item, a list of IDNet channels to search becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to
scroll through the list. When the IDNet channel you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to
start. A sample screen is shown below.

IDNET CHANNEL M12

Press <ENTER> to select for search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.

• Press the Enter button to start the search.

• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any
time if you press the Clear button.

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

40%
Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

20.2.5 Search Option C: Last Search Result

This option simply displays the last Earth Fault Search result. If there has been no search since the last system startup, or if the last search was
aborted, the panel displays "RESULT NOT AVAILABLE."

20.2.6 Completing the Search

When a Location or IDNet Channel Search completes, all of the following occurs:
• All slaves automatically reset.
• The FACP turns off the Earth Fault Search trouble pseudo-point.
• The panel displays the specific fault information.
The panel can only return one Earth Fault Search result at a time. If another fault exists, it can only be found via diagnostics after the first fault is
cleared. Faults will continue to appear, one by one, until each one has been found and corrected.

Important: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or cold-
start).

Continue to the next topic for a list of search results and their required actions.

page 182 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

20.3 Search Results

There are several types of results that can display at the end of an Earth Fault Search. This section covers all types of results.

Important: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or cold-
start).

20.3.1 Non-Point Faults

A non-point fault indicates a ground that cannot be traced to an addressable point (for example, a shield or an audio riser). The earth fault in this
example is not occurring at the audio controller but somewhere in the riser:

CARD 17, ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER

AUDIO RISER 1 EARTH FAULT
Non-point faults can be displayed for each of the following items:
• Shield (Flex 50/100 W Amplifier)
• Audio Riser (Digital./Analog Audio Controller; Local Mode Transponder; may also annunciate as "DAR SECONDARY" (Digital Audio Riser Secondary)
on transponder)
• Remote Mic 1 and Push-to-Talk line (Digital./Analog Audio Controller) (other remote mics are not supported)
• Channel Output (IDNet Card; MAPNET Interface Card)
• RUI Channel (Master Controller Card)
• Channel 1 to 3 (TrueAlert Power Supply)

20.3.2 Point Faults

A point fault indicates a ground at a specific addressable point. The example below is a location earth ground search result, where 3 is the card
address, 10 is the point number, and 0 is the sub-point number (not used):

CARD 003, FLEX 50 AMPLIFIER

3-10-0 EARTH FAULT
Point faults can be found at any point in the system that connects to field wiring.
Some IDNet channel point fault examples are illustrated below.
Fault not cleared. The message below shows that an IDNet channel that has been isolated for fault detection still has the earth fault:

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)

M1, EARTH FAULT SEARCH FAULT CLEAR FAIL
Fault between channel output and first isolator. The message below shows a fault between the IDNet channel output and the first isolator on the
line:

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)

M1, CHANNEL OUTPUT EARTH FAULT
4009 IDNet NAC Extender/TrueAlert Addressable Controller faults. The message below shows a fault detected on the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender
before the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)

M1-18, 4009A NAC EARTH FAULT
Conversely, the following example shows a fault detected after the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)

M1-18, 4009A REPEATER EARTH FAULT
IDNet isolator fault. The message below shows a fault detected after the IDNet isolator was turned on:

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)

M1-3, IDNET ISOLATOR EARTH FAULT

page 183 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

20.3.3 Fault Not Found

If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads FAULT NOT FOUND (for a Location Earth Fault Search) or FAULT CLEAR FAIL (for an IDNet
Channel Earth Fault Search), it means the search could not locate the fault, but it acknowledges that a fault exists.
There are three main possibilities behind this message:
• There are one or more internal wiring earth(s) in the system.
• There are system defects (hardware or software, such as a failed isolation circuit).
• An intermittent earth exists in the system (it occurs inconsistently and is therefore difficult to track via diagnostics).
• The cable to the service port may be grounded due to the remote PC's 3-prong plug. Use a non-grounded plug adapter to the remote PC to get
rid of the earth ground.
• The fault is on an auxiliary output that was excluded from the search.
The problem may have to be found manually and then corrected in some of the above scenarios.

20.3.4 No Fault
If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads NO FAULT, it means the IDNet channel search could not locate any earth faults on that
channel.

20.3.5 Result Not Available

If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads RESULT NOT AVAILABLE, it means there is no result to view. This message comes up only
when you have selected "Last Search Result" on the menu.

20.4 Earth Fault Search Example

The illustration below shows a MINIPLEX system with one transponder that has three earth faults:
• SPS NAC on the SPS in the Main Panel
• RPS AUXPWR output on the RPS in Transponder 1
• IDNet channel in Transponder 1

SPS
SPS
NAC 2

Main
Panel
RPS
RPS
AUXPW R
RUI
Transponder
1
IDNet
Iso Iso
= Ground Fault IDNet Channel
1 2
M2

Figure 123: Earth Fault Example

The panel reports two earth faults, one for each power supply. The third fault is as yet unreported.
The example below shows the progression of events in finding and repairing the three faults. They are presented as instructions to a technician who
does not yet know about the third fault.
A. Find and repair the fault in the main panel.
1. After opening the Earth Fault Search diagnostic menu option, select Location Search.
2. Select the SPS located in the Main Panel (this selects the Main Panel as the location for the search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable

page 184 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

timeout during the search).

5. The search completes. The panel indicates that NAC 2 on the SPS has the earth fault. All slaves are reset (and the panel turns off the earth
fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repair the earth fault on NAC 2.
When this is done, the trouble from the SPS clears but the trouble from the RPS is still indicated.

B. Find and repair the indicated fault on Transponder 1.

1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1 (this selects Transponder 1 as the location for the search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable
timeout during the search).
5. The search completes. The panel indicates FAULT NOT FOUND because the fault is on the excluded AUXPWR circuit. All slaves in Transponder
1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repeat the search but include the AUXPWR circuit this time.
7. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the AUXPWR point on the RPS. All slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns
off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
8. Repair the earth fault on AUXPWR.
Even though you have fixed the fault, the trouble from the RPS is still not clearing. Remember that the only two faults you could see at first were from
the SPS and RPS. It is time to find and clear the next fault.

C. Find and repair the next indicated fault on Transponder 1.

1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1.
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search.
5. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on IDNet Channel M2.
6. Start another search, this time an IDNet Channel Search on Channel M2.
7. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
8. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the IDNet channel between isolators 1 and 2.
9. Repair the earth fault. The trouble from the RPS is cleared.

page 185 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

21 Appendix G: Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and

Accessories
Table 36: Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

P/N DESCRIPTION
4904-9168 V/O 15CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9171 V/O 15CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9176 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
4904-9177 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT VER F/S
4904-9178 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
4904-9183 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9331 V/O 15CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9342 V/O 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4904-9345 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT PLAIN F/S
4904-9174 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED VER F/S
4904-9180 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
4904-9184 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9346 V/O 24VDC 30CD WHT PLAIN F/S
4904-9169 V/O 75CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9172 V/O 75CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9332 V/O 75CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9343 V/O 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4904-9170 V/O 110CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9173 V/O 110CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9175 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
4904-9181 V/O 24VDC 110CD WHT VER F/S
4904-9182 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
4904-9185 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9333 V/O 110CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9344 V/O 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4906-9101 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA
4906-9103 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
4906-9102 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED TNA
4906-9104 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA
4906-9105 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
4906-9106 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
4906-9113 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED
4903-9356 S/V 15CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9359 S/V 15CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9150 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
4903-9153 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
4903-9193 S/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HORIZ F/S
4903-9196 S/V15CD RND
4903-9148 S/V 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
4903-9194 S/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HORIZ F/S
4903-9197 S/V, 30CD, RND TNA
4903-9357 S/V 75CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9360 S/V 75CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9358 S/V 110CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9361 S/V 110CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9198 S/V 110CD, RND TNA

page 186 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 36: Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

P/N DESCRIPTION
4906-9151 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA
4906-9153 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
4906-9154 S/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA

4901-9820 HORN 24VDC RED TNA

4901-9822 HORN 24VDC RED

4009-9201 NAC EXTENDER 120VAC, IDNET

4009-9301 NAC EXTENDER, 240VAC, IDNET
4009-9401 4009 T/A ADDR CONTROLLER

4903-9252 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED HOR F/S

4903-9253 A/V 24VDC 30CD RED HOR F/S
4903-9254 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
4903-9255 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
4903-9256 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
4903-9257 A/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HOR F/S
4903-9258 A/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HOR F/S
4903-9417 A/V 15CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9418 A/V 75CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9419 A/V 110CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9425 A/V 15CD RED STD TNA
4903-9426 A/V 75CD RED STD TNA
4903-9427 A/V 110CD RED STD TNA
4903-9428 A/V 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9429 A/V 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9430 A/V 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9431 A/V 15CD WHITE STD TNA
4903-9432 A/V 75CD WHITE STD TNA
4903-9433 A/V 110CD WHITE STD TNA

4906-9127 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED

4906-9129 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT
4906-9128 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED
4906-9130 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT
4906-9131 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
4906-9132 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
4906-9143 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED

4906-9201 - 9204 MULTI-CANDELA

4906-9251 - 9254 MULTI-CANDELA
4906-9227 - 9230 MULTI-CANDELA
4906-9105 - 9106 WEATHERPROOF
4906-9131 - 9132 WEATHERPROOF
4906-9113 - 9143 WEATHERPROOF

1
49CMTV-APPLW MT HORN/STROBE
1
49CMTV-WWF MT HORN/STROBE
1
49CMTV-WWF-BA MT HORN/STROBE

page 187 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 36: Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

P/N DESCRIPTION
1
49CMTV-WRF MT HORN/STROBE
1
49CMTV-WRF-BA MT HORN/STROBE

1
49CMT-APPLW MT HORN
1
49CMT-WWF MT HORN
1
49CMT-WWF-BA MT HORN
1
49CMT-WRF MT HORN
1
49CMT-WRF-BA MT HORN

4905-9815 SMARTSYNC ADAPTER, TNA

4905-9938 SMARTSYNC CTL MODULE
4090-9005 SRP
4090-9006 SRP w/ENCLOSURE
4098-9772 SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER
4098-9773 CO SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER
1
A maximum of thirteen 49CMT/49CMTV appliances per SmartSync NAC

page 188 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

22 Appendix H: EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

22.1 EPS Compatible Devices
The following devices are compatible with the EPS.

Addressable Appliance Description Model Numbers

4009-9601 (platinum)
4009 IDNAC Repeater
4009-9602 (red)
Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) 4100-6103
TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ module 4905-9929

22.2 EPS Compatible Appliances

The following appliances are compatible with the EPS.

Table 37: Compatible Appliances

TrueAlert ES Appliances TrueAlert Appliances

Addressable Appliance Description
Model Numbers Model Numbers
49AO-WRF 1
49MT-APPLW
49AO-WRF-BA
1
49AO-WRS-BA 49MT-WRF
1
49AO-WWF 49MT-WRF-BA 4901-9850
Audible Only Horn notification appliances
49AO-WWF-BA 49MT-WRS-BA
1 4901-9853
49AO-WWS-BA 1
49MT-WWS-BA
49AO-APPLC 1
49MT-WWF-BA
49AO-APPLC-BA
49AV-WRF
49AV-WWF
49AV-WRF-BA
49AV-WRQ-BA 2
49MTV-APPLW
49AV-WRS-BA 2
49AV-WWF-BA 49MTV-WWF
2 4906-9227
49AV-WWS-BA 49MTV-WWF-BA
2
4906-9228
Audible/Visible notification appliances 49AV-APPLC 49MTV-WRF
4906-9229
49AV-APPLC-BA 49MTV-WRF-BA
2
4906-9230
49AVH-APPLC 2
49MTV-WRS-BA
49AVH-APPLC-BA
2
49AVH-APPLCA 49MTV-WWS-BA
49AVH-APPLCA-BA
49AVH-APPLCB
49AVH-APPLCB-BA

page 189 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 37: Compatible Appliances

TrueAlert ES Appliances TrueAlert Appliances

Addressable Appliance Description
Model Numbers Model Numbers
49VO-WRF
49VO-WWF
49VO-WRA-A 49VOH-APPLCB
49VO-WWA-A 49VOH-APPLCB-BA
49VO-WRA-BA 49VO-WRS-BA
4906-9201
49VO-WRF-BA 49VO-WWA-BA
4906-9202
Visible Only notification appliances 49VO-WRQ-BA 49VO-WWF-BA
4906-9203
49VO-APPLC 49VO-WWS-BA
4906-9204
49VO-APPLC-BA 49VO-WRA-A-BA
49VOH-APPLC 49VO-WWA-A-BA
49VOH-APPLC-BA 49VO-WWS-A-BA
49VOH-APPLCA
49VOH-APPLCA-BA
4906-9251
Speaker/Visible notification appliances - 4906-9253
4906-9254
Audible/Visible Weatherproof notification 49AV-WRFO 49AV-WWFO-BA
-
appliances 49AV-WRFO-BA 49AV-APPLW-CO
49VO-WRFO
Visible Only Weatherproof notification 49VO-WWFO-BA
49VO-WRFO-BA -
appliances 49VO-APPLW-CO
49VO-WRSO-BA
59VO-WRF 59VO-WRFAB-BA
59VO-WRF-BA 59VO-WWFAB
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount 59VO-WWF 59VO-WWFAB-BA
59VO-WWF-BA 59VO-APPLWR
59VO-WRFAB 59VO-APPLWW
59VO-WRFH-BA 59VO-WWFABH-BA
LED Visible-Only High-Candela Wall-Mount 59VO-WWFH-BA 59VO-APPLWRH
59VO-WRFABH-BA 59VO-APPLWWH
59VO-WRFO 59VO-WRFABO-BA
59VO-WRFO-BA 59VO-WWFABO-BA
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount Weatherproof
59VO-WWFO-BA 59VO-APPLWR-O
59VO-WRFABO 59VO-APPLWW-O
LED Visible-Only High-Candela Wall-Mount 59VO-APPLWRH-O
Weatherproof 59VO-APPLWWH-O
59AV-WRF 59AV-WRFAB-BA
59AV-WRF-BA 59AV-WWFAB
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-WWF 59AV-WWFAB-BA
59AV-WWF-BA 59AV-APPLWR
59AV-WRFAB 59AV-APPLWW
59AV-WRFH
59AV-WRFH-BA 59AV-WWFABH-BA
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount High-Candela 59AV-WWFH-BA 59AV-APPLWRH
59AV-WRFABH 59AV-APPLWWH
59AV-WRFABH-BA
59AV-WRFO 59AV-WRFABO-BA
59AV-WRFO-BA 59AV-WWFABO-BA
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount Weatherproof
59AV-WWFO-BA 59AV-APPLWR-O
59AV-WRFABO 59AV-APPLWW-O

page 190 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 37: Compatible Appliances

TrueAlert ES Appliances TrueAlert Appliances

Addressable Appliance Description
Model Numbers Model Numbers
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount High Candela 59AV-APPLWRH-O
Weatherproof 59AV-APPLWWH-O
59AO-WRS 59AO-WWS-BA
Audible-Only Wall-Mount 59AO-WRS-BA 59AO-APPLWR
59AO-WWS 59AO-APPLWW
59AO-WWS-BA
59AO-WRSO 59AO-APPLWR-O
Audible-Only Wall-Mount Weatherproof
59AO-WRSO-BA 59AO-APPLWW-O
59AO-WWSO-BA
49SV-APPLW
49SV-APPLW-BA
49HFV-APPLW
49HFV-APPLW 49SO-APPLW
49HFV-APPLW-BA 49SO-APPLW-BA
Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible (and 49MP-SVWR 49HF-APPLW
Backplate) 49MP-SVWW 49HF-APPLW-BA
49SO-APPLW-O 49MP-SOWR
49SO-APPLW-O-BA 49MP-SOWW
49SV-APPLW-O
49SV-APPLW-O-BA
49SV-APPLW-CO
49SO-APPLC
49SO-APPLC-BA 49SVH-APPLC
49HF-APPLC 49SVH-APPLC-BA
49HF-APPLC-BA 49HFVH-APPLC
Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible
49SV-APPLC 49HFVH-APPLC-BA
49SV-APPLC-BA 49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49HFV-APPLC 49HFVH-APLCB-BA
49HFV-APPLC-BA
Plate 59AP-EUROBB
1.
A maximum of thirty-two 49MT appliances per NAC
2.
A maximum of twenty-one 49MTV appliances per circuit

page 191 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

23 Appendix I: Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock

Protocol For Special Applications
The tables in this appendix list Cooper Wheelock appliances compatible with 4100ES Wheelock protocol for special applications.

23.1 Synchronizing Horn Strobes

Table 38: Synchronizing Horn Strobes

Appliance Description
AS-241575W AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
AS-24MCWH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCCH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
ASWP-24MCWH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ASWP-24MCCH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ASA-24MCW, ASB-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue
ASA-24MCC, ASB-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue
HSR HN STR, Red , 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSRC HN STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSRCS HN STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSRS HN STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSW HN STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSWC HN STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSWCS HN STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSWS HN STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HS4-241575W HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCW HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCWH HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCC HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS-241575W NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
NS-24MCW NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
NS-24MCC NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS-24MCCH NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS-MCW ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS-MCWH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS-24MCC ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS-24MCCH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

23.2 Synchronizing strobes

Table 39: Synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description
RSS-241575W RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSSP-241575W RSSP Series Strobe. 12VDC or 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCW, RSSP-24MCW RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCWH, RSSP-24MCWH RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSS-24MCCH, RSS-24MCCHR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSSR-2415W, RSSR-2415C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSSR-2475W, RSSR-2475C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 75Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount

page 192 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 39: Synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description
RSSR-24110C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Red, Ceiling Mount
RSSA-24110W, RSSB-24110W,
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.
RSSG-24110W, RSSR-24110W
RSSA-24MCC, RSSB-24MCC,
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.
RSSG-24MCC, RSSR-24MCC
RSSA-24MCCH, RSSB-24MCCH,
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.
RSSG-24MCCH, RSSR-24MCCH
RSSPA-24MCC RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber
RSSWPA-2475W RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber
RSSWPA-24MCCH,RSSWPB-24MCCH,
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.
RSSWPG-24MCCH,RSSWPR-24MCCH
RSSWP-2475W, RSSWP-2475C RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSSWP-24MCWH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSSWP-24MCCH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
STR STR, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STRC STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STRCS STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STRS STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STW STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STWC STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STWCS STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STWS STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
ZRS-MCW ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS-MCWH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS-24MCC ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZRS-24MCCH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

23.3 Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Table 40: Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description
(Only Strobe portion compatible with the 4008 Wheelock Protocol for Special Applications)
AMT-241575W,
AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AMT-241575W-NYC
AMT-24MCW AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MT-241575W MT Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount.
MT-24MCW MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP-2475W, MTWP-2475C MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
MTWP-24MCWH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP-24MCCH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
MTWPA-2475W, MTWPB-2475W
MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red
MTWPG-2475W, MTWPR-2475W
MTA-24MCCH, MTB-24MCCH, MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/
MTG-24MCCH, MTR-24MCCH Green/Red
MTWPA-24MCCH, MTWPB-24MCCH, MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/
MTWPG-24MCCH,MTWPR-24MCCH Green/Red
ET70WP-2475W, ET70WP-2475C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
ET70WP-24185W ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 185Cd, Wall Mount
ET70WP-24177C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 177Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WPA-2475 ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Amber

page 193 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 40: Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description
CH70-241575W CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
CH70-24MCW CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90-24MCC CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
CH70-24MCWH CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90-24MCCH CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E50-241575W E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E50-24MCW E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E50-24MCWH E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E50A-24MCC, E50B-24MCC E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mt. Amber/Blue
E60-24MCW E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E60-24MCWH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E60-24MCC E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E60-24MCCH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E70-241575W E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCW E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCWH E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCC, E90-24MCC E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E90-24MCCH E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E60A-24MCC, E70A-24MCC,
E60/E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue
E70B-24MCC, E90A-24MCC, E90B-24MCC
ET70-241575W, ET90-241575W ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCW ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCWH ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCC, ET90-24MCC ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WPG-2475, ET70WPB-2475W
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Green, Blue, Red
ET70WPG-2475W, ET70WPR-2475W
ET90-24MCCH ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET80-241575W ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET80-24MCW ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET80-24MCWH ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
S8-24MCC S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
S8-24MCCH S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
SA-S70-24MCW SA-S70 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
SA-S90-24MCC SA-S90 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

23.4 Synchronizing horns

Table 41: Synchronizing horns

Appliance Description
AH-24 AH Series Horn. 24VDC
AH-24WP AH Series Weatherproof Horn. 12VDC or 24VDC
HS-24 HS Series Horn. 24VDC
HNR Horn, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRC Horn, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRCS Horn, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRS Horn, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNW Horn, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNWC Horn, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNWCS Horn, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNWS Horn, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

page 194 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 41: Synchronizing horns

Appliance Description
MIZ-24S MIZ Series Horn. 24VDC
NH-12/24, NH-12/24R NH Series Horn. 12/24VDC (R=Round)
ZNH ZNH Series Horn. 12/24VDC

23.5 Coded audible appliances

Table 42: Coded audible appliances

Appliance Description
AMT-12/24, AMT-12/24-NYC AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount
CH70, CH90 CH70/CH90 Series Chime. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount
CSX10-24-DC, CSXG10-24-DC CSX Series Bell. 24VDC, Wall Mount
MT-12/24, MT4-12/24 MT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount

23.6 Non-synchronizing appliances

Table 43: Non-synchronizing appliances

Appliance Description
MB-G6-24, MB-G10-24 MB Series Bell. 24V, Wall Mount

page 195 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

24 Appendix J: Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

The following audio system components have been tested by UL to meet the requirements in UL464 Section 24.3 "Determination of low frequency
signal format". These components have only been tested with Simplex speaker Notification Appliances and accessories. The only compatible signal is
the "Horn [520 Hz]" added in revision D of the audio library, chipset 42.

24.1 Compatible Audio System Components

Audio System Component Description Model Numbers

4100-9620
Basic Audio with Microphone
4100-9621
Analog Audio Controller Board 4100-1210
Digital Audio Controller Board 4100-1311
4100-1312
4100-1313
Analog Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers
4100-1363
4100-1364
4100-1326
4100-1327
Digital Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers
4100-1363
4100-1364
4100-1314
4100-1315
4100-1318
4100-1319
Analog 100W Amplifiers
4100-1320
4100-1321
4100-1324
4100-1325
4100-1328
4100-1329
4100-1332
4100-1333
Digital 100W Amplifiers
4100-1334
4100-1335
4100-1338
4100-1339
Flex Amp Expansion NAC Board 4100-1245
Flex Amp Class A Adapter 4100-1246
100 Watt Expansion NAC Board 4100-1248
100 Watt Class A Adapter 4100-1249
4100-1266
Expansion Signal Card and Accessories 4100-1267
4100-5116

24.2 Compatible Notification Appliances

The list of compatible Simplex Speaker Notification Appliances and accessories is as follows.

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

4902-9716
Wall Mount Speaker Only
4902-9717
Ceiling Mount Speaker Only 4902-9721

page 196 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

4906-9151
Wall Mount Speaker Visible
4606-9153
4906-9254
Wall Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-9255
4906-9256
4906-9254
Ceiling Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-9255
4906-9256
4905-9811
4905-9812
4905-9814
4905-9827
4905-9845
4905-9846
Cover Accessories 4905-9980
4905-9981
4905-9988
4905-9989
4905-9991
4905-9996
4905-9997
4905-9941
4905-9942
Surface Mount Adapter Skirts
4905-9946
4905-9947
49SO-APPLC
49SO-APPLC-BA
49SV-APPLC
49SV-APPLC-BA
49SVH-APPLC
49SVH-APPLC-BA
49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49XX Series Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible
49HF-APPLC
49HF-APPLC-BA
49HFV-APPLC
49HFV-APPLC-BA
49HFVH-APPLC
49HFVH-APPLC-BA
49HFVH-APLCB-BA
49SV-APPLW
49SV-APPLW-BA
49SO-APPLW
49SO-APPLW-BA
49XX Series Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible
49HFV-APPLW
49HFV-APPLW-BA
49HF-APPLW
49HF-APPLW-BA

page 197 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

49SOC-CK
49SOC-CR
49SOC-CW
49SOC-WRBA
49SOC-WRBC
49SOC-WRBF
49SOC-WRFEU
49SOC-WRFIRE
49SOC-WRS
49SOC-WWBA
49SOC-WWBC
49SOC-WWBF
49SOC-WWFEU
49SOC-WWFIRE
49SOC-WWS
49SVC-CK
49SVC-CRALT
49SVC-CRBA
49SVC-CRBC
49SVC-CRBF
49SVC-CRFEU
49SVC-CRFIRE
49XX Series Dress Cover Accessories
49SVC-CRS
49SVC-CWALT
49SVC-CWBA
49SVC-CWBC
49SVC-CWBF
49SVC-CWFEU
49SVC-CWFIRE
49SVC-CWS
49SVC-WRALT
49SVC-WRBA
49SVC-WRBC
49SVC-WRBF
49SVC-WRFEU
49SVC-WRFIRE
49SVC-WRS
49SVC-WWALT
49SVC-WWBA
49SVC-WWBC
49SVC-WWBF
49SVC-WWFEU
49SVC-WWFIRE
49SVC-WWS

24.3 Audio Options Alongside Compatible Equipment

The following equipment is not part of the signal path for the 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm signal and therefore may be used along side compatible
components of the audio system.

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

Auxiliary Audio Input Board 4100-1240

page 198 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

4100-1252
4100-1253
Audio Operator Interface Modules
4100-1254
4100-1255
Expansion Bay 4100-2300
Audio Expansion Bay Harness Kit 4100-2320
4100-1259
Constant Supervision Modules
4100-1260
4100-1241
Message Expansion Board
4100-1242

page 199 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25 Appendix K: Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)

4100 back boxes are available in one, two, and three-bay sizes. Each can be equipped with a solid or glass door. This chapter describes how to mount
all types of non-4100ES/4100U back boxes to a wall, and how to mount system electronics bays into the boxes.
This chapter describes every installation procedure that applies directly to the FACP as well as each step of the host panel installation.
Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.

25.1 Introduction to FACPs

4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the master controller, operator interface, universal power supply (UPS), backup batteries, and any additional
modules that the panel requires. The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a
networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.

25.1.1 Master Controller Bay

Every FACP contains a master controller bay. The master controller bay consists of the master controller motherboard, the universal power supply
(UPS), the operator interface, and four open motherboard slots.
In a standalone or MINIPLEX system, the master controller motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it. In a
networked system, a network interface card is attached as a second daughter card to the master controller motherboard.
Figure 124 is an illustration the master controller bay.

MASTER CONTROLLER NETWORK / RS-232 DAUGHTER CARD

DAUGHTER CARD WITH MEDIA CARD

UNIVERSAL POWER
OPTIONAL MOTHERBOARDS SUPPLY (UPS)

MASTER CONTROLLER
MOTHERBOARD
Figure 124: Master Controller Bay (4100)

25.1.2 Master Motherboards and Controllers

The 4100 master motherboard and controller is the central memory and control point for the 4100 system. It mounts in the leftmost side of the
master controller bay.
The figures below are illustrations of the three types of master controller motherboards. They are commonly referred to as Universal Transponder (UT)
motherboards, because they can be used across different types of older Simplex fire alarm systems.

page 200 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Note: See Step 3. Configuring Modules, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

FIELD WIRING UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS

TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J1) 2120 COMM/RS-232
1 CONNECTOR (J3) CARD CONNECTOR (J2)

RESRV

J1
24C
PIEZO
GND
TB1

CTS

PORT1
COMM

RCV
RTS

P1
P2

P3
XMIT

1
INTERNAL COMMS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING
POWER/COMM BUS TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3)
BLOCK (TB2)

Figure 125: UT Motherboard (565-161)

FIELD WIRING UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS CITY CONNECT

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) JUMPERS (P4)
CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2)
CITY CONNECT JUMPERS GND3 FRONT
BACK
1

J1 P4 RESRV
NC T
C B 24C
TB1 NO L PIEZO
GND
P7 NC C CTS
COMM

P5 P6 JW2 P8 + I RCV
JW1 JW1 T
P2 P3 NO Y RTS
P1 - XMIT
GND4

INTERNAL COMMS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING

POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P3) TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P1)
BLOCK (TB2)

Figure 126: UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)

FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS CITY CONNECT
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) JUMPERS (P4)
CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2)

RS-232 / NETWORK RS-232 / NETWORK

JUMPERS (P5, P6, JW1) POWER/COMM BUS
JUMPERS (P7, P8, JW2)
CONNECTOR (P1)
INTERNAL COMMS FIELD WIRING
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P2) TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P3)
BLOCK (TB2)

Figure 127: UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

The figures below are illustrations of the two UT master controllers.

Note: See Step 3. Configuring Modules, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

page 201 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE MASTER DISPLAY

LED (LED1) PORT (P6)

LED1
1
2 P6

P1 P7
MODEM JUMPER (P2) MASTER DISPLAY SW1
MODEM
JUMPER (P7)
P2
RESET BUTTON
BATTERY BACKUP FLASH EPROM (SW1)
JUMPER (P3) JUMPER (P5)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
P3
P5

Not used (P8)

EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P4)

P4

Figure 2-5. UT Master Controller (565-333)

Figure 128: UT Master Controller (565-333)

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE MASTER DISPLAY

LED (LED1) PORT (P4)

LED1
1
2

P6

P1 P7
SW1
MODEM

P2
RESET BUTTON
BATTERY BACKUP FLASH EPROM (SW1)
JUMPER (P2) JUMPER (P3)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
P3
P5

EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P5, P6))

P4

Figure 129: UT Master Controller (565-148)

page 202 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.1.3 Universal Power Supply (UPS)

The power supply controller card contains the switches and jumpers for configuring the power supply, as shown in Figure 130.

Note: See Step 3. Configuring Modules, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

“B” TAP OUTPUT (P15)

OUTPUT EARTH DETECT

CONNECTIONS JUMPER (P16)
(TB2)

POWER “C” TAP

HARNESS OUTPUT (P17)

“A” TAP OUTPUT

(P14) CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“C” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P11)
SWITCHER
PORT (P9)
CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“B” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P12)

AUDIO
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE (P8)

BATTERY/NO
BATTERY
JUMPER (P6)
ADDRESS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW2)

UPS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW1)

“A” TAP
RETURN (P1)
PMSI PORT (P5)

“B” TAP “C” TAP COMM PORT

RETURN (P2) RETURN (P3) (P4)

Figure 130: Universal Power Supply

page 203 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.1.4 Operator Interface

Shown below is the operator interface which is available for the 4100. The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other
status via the Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated keys.

SYSTEM IS NORMAL
12:35:15 am MON 29 JAN 96
FIRE PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM SIGNALS POWER

ALARM ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE SILENCED ON

ALARM ALARM SUPV TBL ALARM SYSTEM

ACK ACK ACK ACK SILENCE RESET

ACKNOWLEDGE

Figure 131: Operator Interface

25.1.5 Additional CPU Bay Modules

The master controller bay can be equipped with many additional types of modules. The cards listed below are limited to the CPU bay only.
• 4100-0139/4120-0139 Service Modem Card. Master controller mezzanine card: Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and
programming purposes.
• 4100-6014/4120-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100
networking operations. May be installed with the 4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, the 4100-6055 Modem Media
Card, and/or the 4100-6301, 4100-6302, 4100-6303 and 4100-6304 Duplex Fiber Media Cards.

25.1.6 Expansion Bays

An FACP always has one master controller bay, and may have one or two expansion bays as well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional
modules that the system might require. Expansion bays are always below the master controller bay.

MASTER
CONTROLLER
BAY

TWO-BAY
CABINET

EXPANSION
BAY

Figure 132: Master Controller and Expansion Bays

page 204 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.1.7 System Power

The FACP is powered primarily by the universal power supply (UPS), which in turn takes power directly from the AC mains and the two backup
batteries.
TO BATTERY

MASTER
CONTROLLER
UPS

POWER
AND TO AC
COMM MAINS

BATTERY BATTERY

Figure 133: Power and Comm Lines

25.2 Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

There are one-bay, two-bay, and three-bay back boxes. The one-bay back box is typically used as a standalone master controller cabinet, while the two
and three-bay cabinets may contain any combination of modules.
• Back boxes are usually shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the
back box containers, store the system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you
are ready to install the system electronic bays.
• All back box PIDs are listed in Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

page 205 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.2.1 Specifications
Table 44 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Table 44: Back Box Specifications

Description Height Width Rough Opening

PID Number
Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width
4100-2001/2011 55 lb. 20-¾ in. 23-½ in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 21-¼ in. 26 ¼ in.
1 Bay
2975-9190/9191 (25 kg) (527 mm) (597 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (540 mm) (667 mm)
4100-2002/2012 125 lb. 36-¼ in. 39-1/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 36-¾ in. 26 ¼ in.
2 Bay
2975-9192/9193 (57 kg) (921 mm) (994 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (933 mm) (667 mm)
4100-2003/2013 185 lb. 52-1/8 in. 55 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 52 5/8 in. 26 ¼ in.
3 Bay
2975-9194/9195 (84 kg) (1,324 mm) (1,397 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (1,337 mm) (667 mm)
Make certain that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure. The Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit should have all
of the items listed in Table 45.

Table 45: Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit

Quantity per back box

Part Number Description
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box
268-010 Lockwasher (No. 8) 6 8 10
490-011 Washer 6 8 10
426-033 Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.) 6 8 10

page 206 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.2.2 Installing the Back Box(es)

Install the back box as shown in Figure 134. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with four 1-½-inch-long (38 mm) lag bolts and four ½-inch-diameter (13
mm) washers.
• The enclosure must be level and plumb when installed. The front surface of the back box must protrude at least three inches from the wall
surface for semi-flush back box installations (refer to Table 44 and the “Rough Opening” section of the table for semi-flush installations).

Figure 134: Back Box Installation Diagram

1. The dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.
2. Use a suitable punch when conduit is required and no knockout is present.
3. Box mounting:
- Minimum 5 inches from an obstruction on the hinged side of the box to permit at least 90 degree angle when the door is open.
- Minimum distance of 3 ¼ inches (83 mm) between boxes.
- Maximum distance of 10 inches (254 mm) between boxes.
4. Conduit A denotes internal panel interconnect harnesses and non power-limited wiring. Conduit B denotes contractor wiring.
5. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in Figure 134. This area is reserved for non power-limited
devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers,
but is always below and to the right of these barriers. Do not use the upper right, right, or bottom knockouts for entrance of power-limited
wiring.
6. When the two back boxes are mounted side-by-side, remove the hinge and the lock catch on the second back box (box on the right).
Remount the hinges on the right side of the second back box. Remount the lock catch on the left side of the second box. Mount the door
upside-down so the locks on both boxes are side-by-side.

25.3 Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes

Before the system cards can be configured, the system electronics bays must be mounted to the FACP back boxes. This section describes that process
for the master controller cabinet and expansion cabinets.

page 207 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.3.1 Installing the System Electronics Bays

The system electronics bays for each back box are mounted on two rails. These rails are secured inside a cardboard shipping container when shipped
from the factory.
Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays.
1. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container. To remove the 635-852 Battery Terminal Block, unscrew the two 8-2 shipping
screws that secure it to the container as shown in Figure 135. Save the two lockwashers and nuts.
2. Remove the 10-32 shipping studs that secure the vertical rails to the shipping container as shown in Figure 135.

Figure 135: Removing the Shipping Studs

3. Using the hardware provided (as referenced in Table 45), insert a mounting screw in both the top right and top left track support holes in the
back box as shown in Figure 136.

page 208 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

BACK BOX

MOUNTING SCREWS

Figure 136: Inserting the Mounting Screws

4. Tighten the two mounting screws, but leave a 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap from the seated position of each screw.
5. Using the vertical rails as handles, carefully lift the system electronics bay assembly and the terminal block from the shipping container.
6. Install the system electronics bay assembly in the back box by carefully placing the rail teardrop holes, located at the top of the rails, onto the
two extended screws in the back box, allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws. See Figure 137.
Note: Make sure you do not pinch the terminal block wiring behind the rails as you mount the bay assembly in the back box.

BACK BOX

PREMOUNTED SCREWS

TEARDROP HOLES

NUT
LOCKWASHER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
SYSTEM ELECTRONICS
BAY ASSEMBLY

SCREW HOLES

Figure 137: Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly

7. Insert the remaining mounting screws through the screw holes in the rails.
8. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 46 for the recommended torque.

page 209 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Table 46: Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces
No.6
(569 to 626 cm/grams)
16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces
No.8
(1,159 to 1,282 cm/grams)
26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces
No.10
(1,930 to 2,139 cm/grams)
9. Place the 635-852 terminal block on the two mounting studs on the right side of the back box as shown in Figure 137.
10. Secure the 635-852 Terminal Block using the two lockwashers and nuts that you set aside in step 1. Use the torque recommendations listed
in Table 46 when securing the terminal block.
At this point, the system is ready for system card installation.

CAUTION: Do not apply power to the system at this time. For more detailed system installation instructions, refer to one of the following publications:
• 4100+/4120/UT System Cards Installation Instructions: FA4-21-305 (574-038)
• 4100+ Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-202 (574-019)
• UT Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-300 (574-901)

page 210 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.4 Step 3. Configuring Modules

The master controller, UPS, and all other modules to be mounted in the FACP back boxes must be configured to operate correctly in the system via
their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware configuration for the master controller and UPS, since they will always be used
in the master controller bay.

25.4.1 Master Motherboard Configuration

The following settings apply to the master motherboard.
P4. City Connect jumpers.
• Local Energy: install jumpers 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, and 13.
• Reverse Polarity: install jumpers 1, 3, 7, 8, and 12.
• Shunt: install jumpers 1, 5, and 13.
• Form C: install jumper 13.
P5-P8, JW1, JW2. (565-274, 565-213 only) Used to enable RS-232/DC Comms or 4120 Network operation.
• If RS-232/DC Comms card is used on the motherboard: install jumpers P5, P6, P7, and P8.
• If a 4120 Network board is used on the motherboard: install jumpers JW1 and JW2.

25.4.2 565-333 Master Controller Configuration

If the 565-333 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
Do not apply power to the system at this time.
• Position 1 – 2: Use port P1.
• Position 2 – 3: Use the service modem.
P3. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.
P5. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.
P7. Makes the card compatible with a given master display.
• Position 1 – 2: Makes the card compatible with the 565-331 Master Display (5 V LCD). Note that Rev B1 of the 565-331 Master Display will not work
with this setting.
• Position 2 – 3: Makes the card compatible with the 565-173 and 565-331 Rev B1 Master Displays (12 V LCD).

25.4.3 565-148 Master Controller Configuration

If the 565-148 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
P2. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.

P3. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.

25.4.4 UPS Configuration

Important: Always configure the UPS as described below.

Note: ON = 0; OFF = 1.

DIP Switch SW1. Controls various UPS functions.

SW1-1. Set to 0. Used when the UPS must be retrofitted to for Intelligent Power Supply capabilities.
• Position 0: UPS acts like an Intelligent Power Supply in terms of messages sent to and received from the master controller.
• Position 1: UPS does not use Intelligent Power Supply functionality at all.
SW1-2. Set to 1 unless UPS B-tap is providing power to a 25-Watt Amplifier. Controls how the amplifier uses the backup battery.
• Position 0: Amplifier switches to battery backup when told to do so by the master controller.
• Position 1: Amplifier switches to battery backup upon loss of AC power.

page 211 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

SW1-3 through SW1-6. These switches work together to configure the UPS for different types of batteries (or no batteries at all). Refer
to Table 47 to determine what settings should be used.

Table 47: UPS SW1 Battery Configurations

DIP Switch Position

UPS Configuration
3 4 5 6
1 0 0 1 Lead-acid battery
1 0 1 0 No battery charger
1 1 0 1 Audio (25 W Amp) and lead-acid battery
1 1 1 0 Audio (25 W Amp) without battery charger
1 0 0 0 NICAD battery
1 1 0 0 Audio (25 W Amp) and NICAD battery
SW1-7. Controls battery charging current.
• Position 0: 50 Ah battery charging.
• Position 1: 110 Ah battery charging.
DIP Switch SW2. Device address DIP switch. See Appendix K: Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) for details.
Use the following jumper settings to continue configuring the UPS.
P6. Battery backup configuration.
• Position 1 – 2: Normal configuration (battery backup).
• Position 2 – 3: No battery backup.

Important: Do not use jumper P6 to bypass troubles from a temporarily disconnected battery.

P7. Amplifier shutdown selection.

• Position 1 – 2: Tap A shutdown enabled.
• Position 3 – 4: Tap B shutdown enabled.
• Position 5 – 6: Tap C shutdown enabled.
P16. Controls Earth Detect configuration.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Earth Detect.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Earth Detect.

Note: Jumpers P10, P13, and JW1 through JW7 are not field adjustable.

25.4.5 Configuring Other Cards

Refer to 4100/4100+ Fire Alarm Universal Transponder (UT) Service Instructions (FA4-51-207) to configure other cards that are located in master
controller bays and expansion bays.

page 212 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

25.5 Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards

Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in the master controller bay. Read this section to ensure that cards are interconnected.

25.5.1 Interconnecting Cards

Use the following instructions and Figure 138 to interconnect master controller bay cards.
1. Use the 733-659 Harness to connect P14 on the UPS to P3 on the master controller motherboard. Note that the P3 connector has eight
pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Use 733-672 Harness to connect P4 on the UPS to P2 on the master controller motherboard. Like the P2 connector, P3 has eight pins. Insert
the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins.
3. If you are installing a new motherboard, orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the
left.
4. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard.
5. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
Important: The leftmost board must always be the master controller motherboard.

733-659

P14

UPS P1
P2

P3
P4 J1 or
J3

733-672

Figure 138: Master Controller Bay Interconnections

25.6 Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays

This section describes how to interconnect motherboards in expansion bays, and how to connect the expansion bays electrically to the master
controller bay.

25.6.1 Guidelines
Up to eight 2 (51 mm) x 11 ½-inch (292 mm) motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay. Adhere to the following guidelines when installing a
motherboard in an expansion bay:
• If a power supply is installed, it must be placed on the far right of the bay.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots (just left of the power supply, if there is one). This is necessary to allow for the proper
routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these
modules contains the J1 or P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.

25.6.2 Installing Motherboards

Use the following directions and Figure 139 to install a motherboard into an expansion bay.

page 213 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the motherboard you are installing. Slide the motherboard
to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost
board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
The motherboard can be installed in any of the
eight slots.

P1

J1 or
J3

Figure 139: Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay

4. If you are installing the leftmost motherboard, connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic to connect
the harness.

25.6.3 Connecting the 733-525 Harness

If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure 140 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and
communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.
If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the master controller motherboard and
continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a
4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the second slot
from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
- Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
- Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the
left side of the bay.
- Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
- Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector
on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

page 214 574-848 Rev BF

 4100ES Fire Alarm System Installation Guide

Figure 140: Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

page 215 574-848 Rev BF

© 2018 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to
change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals
under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Microsoft and
Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd. 574-848 Rev BF